Seat Cordoba Edition 09.05 2005 Sedan Owner's Manual PDF
Summary of Content for Seat Cordoba Edition 09.05 2005 Sedan Owner's Manual PDF
c o r d o b a
ow ne
r s
m an
ua l
auto emocin
lly to familiarise yourself quickly
contribute to the conservation of
s and parts exchange.
ecause this belongs with the
cordoba_ingles Seite 1 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Foreword This owner's manual and the corresponding supplements should be read carefu
with your vehicle.
Also, the regular care and maintenance and correct handling of the vehicle will
its value.
For safety reasons, note the information concerning accessories, modification
If selling the vehicle, give all of the onboard documentation to the new owner b
vehicle.
cordoba_ingles Seite 2 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Contents 3
onditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
eating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
emiautomatic air conditioning (Climatic) . . . .
limatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
eneral notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
teering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
afety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
nition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
tarting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . .
anual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
utomatic gearbox* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
andbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
s and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
rakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
nti-lock brake system and traction control ABS
lectronic stabilisation program (ESP)* . . . . . . .
ing and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
unning-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
atalytic converter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
riving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
railer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
riving economically and with respect for the
nvironment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ning and caring for your vehicle . . . . . . .
eneral notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
are of the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
are of the vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
112
115
118
120
122
122
123
124
125
128
129
133
134
139
139
139
140
141
143
143
144
145
149
151
153
153
154
159
cordoba_ingles Seite 3 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Contents
The structure of this manual . . . . .
Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Proper sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . . .
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stowing luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Belt tension devices* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deactivating airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital display in the instrument panel . . . . . . .
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel controls* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio control via the controls on the steering
wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio frequency remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sliding/tilting roof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seats and stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The importance of correct seat adjustment . . . .
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stowage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ashtrays, cigarette lighter and electrical sockets
First-aid kit, warning triangle, fire extinguisher
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air c
H
S
C
G
Driv
S
S
Ig
S
M
A
H
C
Tip
Inte
B
A
E
Driv
R
C
D
T
D
e
Clea
G
C
C
5
6
7
7
7
9
14
15
17
17
19
22
26
28
28
31
34
38
41
43
43
45
47
51
51
51
52
54
60
68
68
70
70
75
77
79
82
83
86
88
88
92
93
94
96
99
99
100
102
104
105
107
109
109
Contents4
cordoba_ingles Seite 4 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Accessories, parts replacement and
modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories and parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mobile telephones and two-way radios . . . . . . .
Fitting a towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades . . . .
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle tools, spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamp change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General notes on the technical data . . . . . . .
What you should be aware of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How are the figures measured? . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.2 47 kW (64 CV) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.4 16 V 55 kW (75 CV) . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.4 16 V 55 kW (75 CV) Automatic
Petrol engine 1.4 16 V 74 kW (101 CV) . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 2.0 85 kW (115 CV) . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 1.4l TDI 51 kW (70 bhp) . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 1.4l TDI 55 kW (75 bhp) . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 1.4l TDI 59 kW (80 bhp). . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 1.9l SDI 47 kW (64 bhp) . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 1.9l TDI 47 kW (101 bhp) . . . . . .
Diesel engine 1.9l TDI 96 kW (131 bhp) . . . . . .
Dimensions and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
162
162
162
163
163
164
166
166
167
168
169
172
177
179
182
183
185
191
191
191
197
204
214
217
219
219
219
221
222
222
224
224
225
226
228
229
231
232
234
235
237
239
241
243
245
The structure of this manual 5
The structure of this manual Before reading this manual it must be understood This manual describes the vehicle equipment at the time of publication.
Some of the equipment described here will not be available until a later date,
or is available only in certain markets.
Because this is a general manual for the CORDOBA, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modified depending on the technical requirements and on the market; this should is in no way be inter- preted as dishonest advertising.
Illustrations are intended as a general guide, and may vary from the equip-
ment fitted in your vehicle in some details.
The direction indications (left, right, front, rear) appearing in this manual
refer to the normal forward working direction of the vehicle except when
otherwise indicated.
The equipment marked with an asterisk* comes in series only in determined
model versions, are supplied as optional only for some versions, or are only
offered in different countries.
All registered marks are indicated with . Even if the copyright symbol
does not appear this does not mean that the mark is not copyrighted.
The section is continued on the following page.
Indicates the end of a section.
WARNING
Texts with this symbol contain safety information. They warn you of serious dangers, possibly involving accident or injury.
Caution Texts with this symbol draw your attention to a possible risk of damage to
your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment Texts with this symbol refer to points relevant to the protection of the environ-
ment.
Note Texts with this symbol contain additional information of a more general
nature.
cordoba_ingles Seite 5 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Content6
Content This manual is structured to give you the information you need as quickly and
clearly as possible. The contents of this Manual are grouped into relatively
short sections making up chapters (e.g.Air conditioning). The entire
manual is divided into five large parts which are:
1. Safety First Information on the vehicle equipment relating to passive safety such as seat
belts, airbags, seats, etc.
2. Controls and equipment Information about the distribution of controls in the driver position of the
vehicle, about the seat adjustment possibilities, how to create a suitable
climate in the passenger compartment, etc.
3. Tips and Maintenance Advice relating to driving, care and maintenance of your vehicle and certain
problems which you may solve yourself.
4. Technical Data Figures, data, dimensions and measurements (for example fuel consump-
tion) of your vehicle.
5. Alphabetic index At the end of this manual there is a detailed alphabetical index, this will help
you to rapidly find the information you require.
cordoba_ingles Seite 6 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Safe driving 7
Safety Fir Technical Data
s a part of the occupant protection
the risk of injury during an accident.
fety and the safety of your passengers. In the
ty equipment could reduce the risk of injury. The
f the safety equipment in your SEAT:
at belts,
e front and rear seats,
e front seats,
r the front seats,
eat backrests.
r ISOFIX child seats on the outer seats in the
straints,
e position and non-use position
n.
ned above works together to provide you and
t possible protection in accident situations. But
t help you or your passengers if you or your
rect sitting position or do not properly adjust or
cordoba_ingles Seite 7 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Safety First
Safe driving
Brief introduction
Dear SEAT Driver
Safety first!
This chapter contains important information, advice, suggestions
and warnings that should be read and followed in the interest of
your own safety and the safety of your passengers.
WARNING
This manual contains important information concerning the driver's and passengers' handling of the vehicle. The other booklets in the vehicle wallet also contain further information which you should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers.
Ensure that the complete vehicle wallet is always in the vehicle. This is especially important when you lend or sell the vehicle to others.
Safety equipment
The safety equipment i
system and can reduce
Never gamble with your sa
event of an accident, the safe
following list includes most o
Optimised three-point se
Belt tension limiter for th
belt tension devices for th
belt height adjustment fo
front airbags,
side airbags in the front s
curtain airbags,
ISOFIX anchor points fo
second row,
height-adjustable head re
head restraints with in-us
adjustable steering colum
The safety equipment mentio
your passengers with the bes
this safety equipment canno
passengers assume an incor
use this equipment.
Safe driving8
adjust the head restraints according to
propriate child seats and properly
age 43.
ing position. Instruct your passengers
r sitting position page 9.
t belt correctly before driving off. Instruct
fasten their seat belts properly
fety?
determined by your driving style and
of all occupants.
ible for yourself and your passengers.
r driving safety is affected, you endanger
n the road , for this reason:
be distracted from the traffic around you,
elephone conversations.
riving ability is impaired (e.g. by medica-
d speed limits.
ed as appropriate for road, traffic and
cordoba_ingles Seite 8 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Therefore, information is provided about why this equipment is so important,
how it protects you, what you have to observe when using it and how you and
your passengers can achieve the greatest possible benefit from the safety
equipment fitted. This manual includes important warnings that you and your
passengers should observe in order to reduce the risk of injury.
Safety is everyone's business!
Before every trip
The driver bears the responsibility for his passengers and the
operational worthiness of the vehicle.
For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note
the following points before every trip:
Ensure that the vehicle's lights and turn signals operate flaw-
lessly.
Check tyre pressure.
Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the
surroundings.
Securely restrain all parcels page 15.
Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.
Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors properly for your
size.
Ensure that the passenger in the central rear seat always has the
head restraint in position page 13.
Instruct passengers to
their height.
Protect children with ap
applied seat belts p
Assume the correct sitt
also to assume a prope
Always fasten your sea
your passengers also to
page 17.
What affects driving sa
Driving safety is largely
the personal behaviour
As driver, you are respons
When your concentration o
yourself as well as others o
Do not allow yourself to
e.g. by passengers or t
Never drive when your d
tion, alcohol, drugs).
Observe traffic laws an
Always reduce your spe
weather conditions.
Safe driving 9
Safety Fir Technical Data
reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
the following adjustments for the driver:
eel so that there is a distance of at least
ering wheel and the centre of your chest
forwards or backwards so that you are able
r, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with
y angled .
ach the highest point of the steering
int so that its upper edge is at the same
head, or as close as possible to the same
r head fig. 2.
n upright position so that your back rests
Fig. 2 Proper head restraint position for driver
cordoba_ingles Seite 9 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least
every two hours.
If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or are under pres-
sure of time.
WARNING
When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci- dents increases.
Proper sitting position for occupants
Proper sitting position for driver
The proper sitting position for the driver is important for safe
and relaxed driving.
For your own safety and to
accident, we recommend
Adjust the steering wh
25 cm between the ste
fig. 1.
Move the driver's seat
to press the accelerato
your knees still slightl
Ensure that you can re
wheel.
Adjust the head restra
level as the top of your
level as the top of you
Move the backrest to a
completely against it.
Fig. 1 The proper distance between driver and steering wheel
Safe driving10
for front passenger
st sit at least 25 cm away from the
irbag can provide the greatest
e event that it is triggered.
reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
he following adjustments for the front
er seat back as far as possible .
upright position so that your back rests
nt so that its upper edge is at the same
head, or as close as possible to the same
head page 12.
otwell in front of the front passenger seat.
t belt correctly page 17.
passenger airbag in exceptional circum-
w to adjust the front passenger's seat, see
ion of the front passenger can lead to severe
cordoba_ingles Seite 10 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Always fasten your seat belt correctly page 17.
Keep both feet in the footwell so that you have the vehicle under
control at all times.
Adjustment of the driver's seat page 99.
WARNING
An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries.
Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between the centre of the chest and the hub of the steering wheel page 9, fig. 1. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.
If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. This reduces the risk of injury when the driver airbag is triggered.
Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, you may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and head.
To reduce the risk of injury to the driver during sudden braking manoeu- vres or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the back- rest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or the incorrect sitting position!
Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve optimal protection.
Proper sitting position
The front passenger mu
dash panel so that the a
possible protection in th
For your own safety and to
accident, we recommend t
passenger:
Move the front passeng
Move the backrest to an
completely against it.
Adjust the head restrai
level as the top of your
level as the top of your
Keep both feet in the fo
Always fasten your sea
It is possible to deactivate the
stances page 23.
For detailed information on ho
page 102.
WARNING
An incorrect sitting posit injuries.
Safe driving 11
Safety Fir Technical Data
the correct position page 12
ootwell in front of the rear seat.
t belt correctly page 17.
ld restraint system when you take children
43.
rear seat are not sitting properly, they could
t properly to achieve maximum protection.
de optimal protection when backrests are in an sengers are wearing their seat belts properly. t are not sitting in an upright position, the risk
sitioning of the belt web increases.
cordoba_ingles Seite 11 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Adjust the front passenger seat so that there is at least 25 cm between your breast bone and the dash panel. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.
If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
Always keep your feet in the footwell when the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the instrument panel, out the window or on the seat. An incor- rect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in the event of a braking manoeuvre or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting position.
To reduce the risk of injury to the front passenger during sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident, never travel with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrest is in an upright position and the front passenger is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or the incorrect sitting position!
Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve maximum protection.
Correct sitting position for passengers in the rear seats
Passengers in the rear seats must sit up straight, keep their
feet in the footwells, have the rear central head restraint posi-
tioned for use and wear their seat belts properly.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking
manoeuvre or an accident, passengers on the rear bench seat must
observe the following:
Adjust the headrest to
Keep both feet in the f
Always fasten your sea
Use an appropriate chi
in the vehicle page
WARNING
If the passengers on the sustain severe injuries.
Adjust the head restrain
Seat belts can only provi upright position and the pas If passengers on the rear sea of injury due to incorrect po
WARNING (continued)
Safe driving12
roperly to achieve maximum protection.
nt so that its upper edge is at the same
head, or as close as possible to the same
head and, at the very least, at eye
. 4.
page 99.
estraints removed or improperly adjusted njuries.
restraints could result in death in the event of
restraints also increase the risk of injury driving or braking manoeuvres.
always be adjusted according to the occu-
cordoba_ingles Seite 12 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Correct adjustment of head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
occupant protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations.
Adjust the head restraint p
Adjust the head restrai
level as the top of your
level as the top of your
level fig. 3 and fig
Adjusting the head restraints
WARNING
Travelling with the head r increases the risk of severe i
Incorrectly adjusted head a collision or accident.
Incorrectly adjusted head during sudden or unexpected
The head restraints must pant's size.
Fig. 3 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the front
Fig. 4 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the side
Safe driving 13
Safety Fir Technical Data
adjustment of the head restraints.
itting positions
ition can lead to severe injuries to
timal protection only when the belt webs
ncorrect sitting positions substantially
tion of seat belts and increase the risk of
t web position. As the driver, you are
occupants, especially children.
o assume an incorrect sitting position in
lling .
amples of sitting positions which could be
The list is not complete, but we would like to
.
icle is in motion:
,
r to the rear,
sh panel,
h,
e of a seat,
cordoba_ingles Seite 13 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Centre rear head restraint*
The central rear head restraint has 2 positions:
Raised position or position for use fig. 5. In this position, the head
restraint is used normally, protecting the occupant of the rear central seat,
along with the rear seat belts.
Rest position fig. 5. This position improves the driver's rear visi-
bility.
To fit the head restraint in position for use , pull on the edges with both
hands in the direction of the arrow. To place it in rest position , lower the
head restraint.
WARNING
Whenever a passenger is seated in the rear central seat, the head restraint should be placed in the position for use .
Note Note the instructions on the
Examples of incorrect s
An incorrect sitting pos
occupants.
Seat belts can provide op
are properly positioned. I
reduce the protective func
injury due to incorrect bel
responsible for all vehicle
Never permit anyone t
the vehicle while trave
The following list contains ex
dangerous for all occupants.
make you aware of this issue
Therefore, whenever the veh
Never stand in the vehicle
never stand on the seats,
never kneel on the seats,
never tilt your backrest fa
never lean against the da
never lie on the rear benc
never sit on the front edg
never sit sideways,
Fig. 5 Adjusting central rear head restraint
AA
AB
AA
AB
AA
Safe driving14
can return unimpaired to their initial posi-
e the pedal area free and can be securely
e pedal must be free to move further than
hicle to a stop.
ort your feet properly and give you a good feel
on can lead to critical situations while driving.
driver footwell. An object could move into the operation. In the event of a sudden driving or not be able to operate the brake, clutch or ident!
r side
used which can be securely fastened
ot impair operation of the pedals.
ats are securely fastened during the trip
pedals .
ve the pedals clear and which are secured to
ou can obtain suitable floor mats from a quali-
cordoba_ingles Seite 14 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
never lean out of a window,
never put your feet out of a window,
never put your feet on the dash panel,
never put your feet on the surface of a seat,
never travel in a footwell,
never travel on a seat without wearing the seat belt,
never carry any person in the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Every incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries.
Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the occupants to severe injuries if airbags deploy, striking an occupant who has assumed an incorrect sitting position.
Before the vehicle moves, assume the proper sitting position and main- tain it throughout the trip. Before every trip, instruct your passengers to assume the proper sitting position and to maintain it during the trip page 9, Proper sitting position for occupants.
Pedal area
Pedals
The operation and freedom of movement of all pedals must
never be impaired by objects or floor mats.
Ensure that you can always press the accelerator, brake and
clutch pedals unimpaired to the floor.
Ensure that the pedals
tions.
Use only floor mats which leav
fastened in the footwell.
If a brake circuit fails, the brak
normal in order to bring the ve
Wear suitable shoes
Always wear shoes which supp
for the pedals.
WARNING
Restricting pedal operati
Never place objects in the pedal area and impair pedal braking manoeuvre, you will accelerator pedal. Risk of acc
Floor mats on the drive
Only floor mats may be
in the footwell and do n
Ensure that the floor m
and do not obstruct the
Only use floor mats which lea
prevent them from slipping. Y
fied dealership.
Safe driving 15
Safety Fir Technical Data
r objects in the luggage compartment can
he luggage compartment and secure them on
traps to secure heavy objects.
res or accidents, loose objects can be flung upants. This increased risk of injury will be bject is struck by an inflating airbag. If this
nsformed into missiles. Risk of fatal injury.
tre of gravity may shift when transporting ct the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci-
ial to adjust your speed and driving style nts.
d axle loads or allowed maximum weight. If the wed total weight is exceeded, the driving char- y change, leading to accidents, injuries and
unattended, especially when the tailgate is nto the luggage compartment closing the door in trapped without help and there is a mortal
lay in or around the vehicle. Close and lock doors when you leave the vehicle. Before you that there are no adults or children in the
ers in the luggage compartment. Every belted in page 17.
cordoba_ingles Seite 15 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
WARNING
If the pedals are obstructed, you could cause an accident. Risk of serious injuries.
Ensure that the floor mats are always securely attached.
Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals. Risk of accident.
Stowing luggage
Loading the luggage compartment
All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured in
the luggage compartment.
Unsecured objects which shift back and forth could impair the
driving safety or driving characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the
centre of gravity.
Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment.
Lay and stow heavy luggage as far forward as possible in the
luggage compartment.
Stow heavy luggage as low as possible in the luggage compart-
ment.
Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening rings page 16.
WARNING
Loose luggage and othe cause serious injuries.
Always stow objects in t the fastening rings.
Use suitable specialist s
During sudden manoeuv forward, injuring vehicle occ further increased if a loose o happens, objects can be tra
Please note that the cen heavy objects; this may affe dent. Therefore, it is essent accordingly, to avoid accide
Never exceed the allowe allowed axle load or the allo acteristics of the vehicle ma damage to the vehicle.
Never leave your vehicle open. Children could climb i behind them; they will rema risk.
Never allow children to p both the tailgate and all the lock the vehicle, make sure vehicle.
Never transport passeng passenger must be properly
Safe driving16
her objects are secured to the fastening rings ed retaining cords, injuries could result in the or accidents.
age or other objects from flying forward, ning cords which are secured to the fastening
on the fastening rings.
cordoba_ingles Seite 16 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Note Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used
air escapes through ventilation slits in the side trim of the luggage compart-
ment. Ensure that the ventilation slits are never covered.
Straps for securing the load to the fastening rings are commercially
available.
Fastening rings
There are four fastening rings in the luggage compartment
which can be used to secure luggage and other objects.
Always use suitable and undamaged straps to secure luggage
and other objects to the fastening rings in Loading the
luggage compartment on page 15.
Pull up the fastening rings to attach the straps.
During a collision or an accident, even small and light objects can possess so
much energy that they can cause very severe injuries. The amount of kinetic
energy depends on the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the object.
The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle.
For example: an object weighing 4.5 kg is lying unsecured in the vehicle.
During a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, this object generates a force
corresponding to 20 times its weight. That means that the effective weight of
the object increases to about 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of the inju-
ries which might be sustained if this projectile strikes an occupant as it flies
through the passenger compartment. This increased risk of injury will be
further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag.
WARNING
If pieces of baggage or ot with inappropriate or damag event of braking manoeuvres
To prevent pieces of lugg always use appropriate retai rings.
Never secure a child seat
Seat belts 17
Safety Fir Technical Data
er places, two individual front seats and three
seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt.
ople than there are seats available in the
hicle must properly fasten and wear the seat eat. Children must be protected with an appro- .
*
as a reminder to the driver to fasten
t belt correctly before driving off.
rs to fasten their seat belts properly before
ith child restraint systems appropriate for
children.
cordoba_ingles Seite 17 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Seat belts
Introduction
Always fasten seat belts before driving!
Properly worn seat belts can save lives!
In this chapter you will learn why seat belts are so important, how
they work and how to properly fasten, adjust and wear them.
Read and observe all the information as well as the warnings in
this chapter.
WARNING
If the seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju- ries increases.
Properly worn seat belts can reduce severe injuries in the event of sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents. Therefore, you and your passen- gers should always wear the seat belts properly as long as the vehicle is in motion.
Pregnant women or persons with physical disabilities must also use seat belts. Like all other occupants, these persons can also sustain severe injuries if they are not wearing their seat belts properly.
Number of seats
Your vehicle has five passeng
places on the rear seat. Each
WARNING
Never transport more pe vehicle.
Every occupant in the ve belt belonging to his or her s priate child restraint system
Seat belt warning lamp
The warning lamp acts
the seat belt.
Before you drive:
Always fasten your sea
Instruct your passenge
driving off.
Protect your children w
the size and age of the
Seat belts18
cordoba_ingles Seite 18 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
The warning lamp in the combi-instrument lights up if the driver seat belt
is not fastened when the ignition is switched on. In addition, an acoustic
signal can also be heard for a couple of seconds.
The warning lamp* does not go out until the driver seat belt is fastened
while the ignition is switched on.
Seat belts 19
Safety Fir Technical Data
sics in the case of a frontal collision may be
y: As the vehicle moves fig. 6 the vehicle and
late a stored energy called kinetic energy.
y depends on the speed of the vehicle and the
sengers. The higher the speed and the greater
there is to be released in an accident.
owever, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed
km/h, for example, the kinetic energy increases
ur example are not restrained by seat belts, the
gy has to be absorbed at the point of impact
50 km/h, the forces acting on bodies in a colli-
nne (1,000 kg). At greater speed these forces
belts are not attached to the vehicle. In a
inue to move forward at the speed their vehicle
Fig. 7 The vehicle with unbelted occupants strikes the wall.
cordoba_ingles Seite 19 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Why wear seat belts?
Frontal collisions and the laws of physics
In the event of a frontal collision, a large amount of kinetic
energy must be released.
The action of the laws of phy
explained in the following wa
the passengers alike accumu
The amount of kinetic energ
weight of the vehicle and pas
the weight, the more energy
The most significant factor, h
doubles from 25 km/h to 50
by a factor of four.
Because the passengers in o
entire amount of kinetic ener
fig. 7.
Even at speeds of 30 km/h to
sion can easily exceed one to
are even higher.
Passengers not wearing seat
frontal collision they will cont
Fig. 6 Passengers of a vehicle heading for a brick wall. They are not wearing seat belts.
Seat belts20
acting on the body in a collision are so great
oneself with one's hands. In a frontal collision,
wn forward and will make violent contact with
, windscreen or whatever else is in the way
stitute for the seat belts. When deployed,
al protection. All occupants (including the
elts properly during the trip. This will reduce
e event of an accident regardless of whether
.
ered only once. To achieve the best possible
always be worn properly so that you will be
h no airbag is deployed.
passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they
ward violently in an accident. Rear passengers
anger not only themselves but also the front
Fig. 9 The unbelted rear passenger is thrown forward violently, hitting the driver wearing a seat belt.
cordoba_ingles Seite 20 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
was travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to frontal
accidents, but to all accidents and collisions.
The danger of not using the seat belt
Many people believe that the occupants can protect them-
selves with their hands in a minor collision, this is false.
Even at low speeds the forces
that it is not possible to brace
unbelted passengers are thro
the steering wheel, dashboard
fig. 8.
The airbag system is not a sub
airbags provide only addition
driver) must be wearing seat b
the risk of severe injuries in th
an airbag is fitted for the seat
Note that airbags can be trigg
protection, the seat belt must
protected in accidents in whic
It is also important for the rear
could otherwise be thrown for
who do not use seat belts end
occupants fig. 9.
Fig. 8 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown forward violently.
Seat belts 21
Safety Fir Technical Data
n seat belts before every trip, even when "just
wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics
at belts to be an effective means of substantially
d improving the chances of survival in a serious
orn seat belts improve the protection provided
accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt is
tries.
ipped with airbags, the seat belts must be
airbags, for example, are only triggered in some
irbags will not be triggered during minor frontal
ns, rear collisions, rolls or accidents in which the
e control unit is not exceeded.
wear your seat belt and ensure that your
eir seat belts properly before you drive off!
seat belts
rrectly, they can reduce the risk of
elt as described in this booklet.
lts can be fastened at all times and are not
incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju- rotection from seat belts can be achieved only
cordoba_ingles Seite 21 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Seat belts protect
Passengers not wearing seat belts risk severe injuries in the
event of an accident.
Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sitting posi-
tions and substantially reduce the kinetic energy in the event of an accident.
Seat belts also help to prevent uncontrolled movements which could lead to
severe injuries. In addition, properly worn seat belts reduce the danger of
being thrown from the car.
Passengers wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability
of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. The front crumple zones and other
passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are also designed to
absorb the kinetic energy generated in a collision. Taken together, all these
features reduce the forces acting on the occupants and consequently the risk
of injury.
Our examples describe frontal collisions. Of course, properly worn seat belts
reduce substantially the risk of injury in all other types of accidents. This is
why it is so important to faste
driving around the corner".
Ensure that your passengers
have shown properly worn se
reducing the risk of injury an
accident. Further, properly w
by airbags in the event of an
required by law in most coun
Although your vehicle is equ
fastened and worn. The front
frontal accidents. The front a
collisions, minor side collisio
airbag trigger threshold in th
Therefore, you should always
passengers have fastened th
Safety notes on using
If seat belts are used co
injury in an accident.
Always wear the seat b
Ensure that the seat be
damaged.
WARNING
If the seat belts are worn ries increases. The optimal p if you use them properly.
Fig. 10 Driver protected by the properly worn seat belt during a sudden braking manoeuvre.
Seat belts22
damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts ified in any way.
ean, otherwise the retractors may not work
nt and rear occupants are locked into
its full protection if the belt web is not
Fig. 11 Belt buckle and latch plate of seat belt
cordoba_ingles Seite 22 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Fasten your seat belt before every trip - even when driving in town. That applies also to your front and rear passengers danger of injury!
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the belt web is not posi- tioned correctly.
Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat belt.
Keep both feet in the foot-well in front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in motion.
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.
The belt webbing must never be twisted while it is being worn.
The belt webbing should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries.
Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect posi- tion.
Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and function of the belts, reducing their capacity to protect.
The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely.
Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or similar instruments to alter the position of the belt webbing.
Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an acci- dent. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals.
Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and stretched must be replaced by a qualified workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked.
Do not attempt to repair a must not be removed or mod
The belts must be kept cl properly page 161.
Seat belts
Seat belt adjustment
The seat belts for the fro
position by a latch.
The seat belt cannot offer
positioned correctly.
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Seat belts 23
Safety Fir Technical Data
ximum protection only when they are
Fig. 12 Correct belt web and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from front
Fig. 13 Correct belt web and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from side
cordoba_ingles Seite 23 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.
To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly
across your chest and lap.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and
push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click
page 22, fig. 11.
Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in
the buckle.
The seat belts are equipped with an automatic retractor on the shoulder
strap. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the shoulder belt is pulled
slowly. However, during sudden braking, during travel in mountains or bends
and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is
locked.
The automatic belt retractors on the front seats are fitted with belt tension
devices page 26.
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.
The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an upright position and the seat belts have been fastened properly.
Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is increased.
If an occupant is incorrectly belted in, the belt cannot protect him or her properly. An incorrectly positioned belt web can cause extremely severe injuries.
Always engage the retractor lock when you are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1 page 43.
Seat belt position
Seat belts offer their ma
properly positioned.
Seat belts24
also fasten their seat belts properly
he unborn child is for the mother to
rly at all times during the pregnancy.
imum protection only when the belt web
age 23.
d head restraint correctly page 9.
pull the belt evenly across your chest and
the pelvis fig. 14.
to the buckle for the corresponding seat
it is securely locked with an audible click
hat the latch plate is securely engaged in
Fig. 14 Positioning seat belts during pregnancy
cordoba_ingles Seite 24 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
The following features are available to adjust the seat belt in the shoulder
region:
belt height adjustment for the front seats.
front seat height adjustment*.
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the torso page 23, fig. 12.
The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the pelvis page 23, fig. 13. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.
Read and observe the warnings page 21.
Pregnant women must
The best protection for t
wear the seat belt prope
The seat belt provides max
is properly positioned p
Adjust the front seat an
Holding the latch plate,
as low as possible over
Insert the latch plate in
and push it down until
.
Pull the belt to ensure t
the buckle.
Seat belts 25
Safety Fir Technical Data
hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim
hile the vehicle is in motion. If you do, you ng severe or fatal injuries.
height
ers can be used to adjust the position
houlder.
the front seats can be used to adjust the
shoulder.
Fig. 16 Location of the belt height adjuster
cordoba_ingles Seite 25 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.
For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and always lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen.
Read and observe the warnings page 21.
Seat belt release
The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has
come to a standstill.
Press the red button on the belt buckle fig. 15. The latch plate
is released and springs out .
Guide the belt back by
is not damaged
WARNING
Never unbuckle a seat belt w increase the risk of sustaini
Adjusting the seat belt
Seat belt height adjust
of the seat belt at the s
The seat belt adjuster for
proper belt position at the
Fig. 15 Removing latch plate from buckle
Seat belts26
es*
sion device
, the seat belts on the front seats are
.
upants are equipped with belt tension devices.
nsion devices during severe head-on, lateral
seat belt is being worn. This retracts and
ing the forward motion of the occupants.
triggered only once.
ot be triggered in the event of a light frontal,
hicle overturns, or in situations where no large
rear of the vehicle.
are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is
at there was a fire in the vehicle.
ments must be observed when the vehicle or
scrapped. A qualified workshop is familiar with
pleased to pass on the information to you.
belt tension devices
omponents of the seat belts that are installed
you work on the belt tension devices or remove
when performing other repair work, the seat
nsequence may be that, in the event of an acci-
function incorrectly or not at all.
cordoba_ingles Seite 26 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Press the upper part of the shoulder belt guide and hold it in this
position page 25, fig. 16.
Move the shoulder belt guide up or down until you have adjusted
the seat belt page 23.
After adjusting, pull the shoulder belt sharply to check that the
catch on the shoulder belt guide is engaged securely.
Incorrectly fastened seat belts
Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe injuries.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is
properly worn. The seat belts must be fastened exactly in the order
described in this chapter. An incorrect sitting position impairs
substantially the protection a seat belt offers and can lead to severe
or fatal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially
increased when a deploying airbag strikes an occupant who has
assumed an incorrect sitting position. As driver, you are responsible
for all vehicle occupants, especially children. Therefore:
Never permit anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in
the vehicle while travelling .
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt increases the risk of severe injuries.
Before every trip, instruct your passengers to adjust their seat belts properly and to wear them during the trip.
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of seat belts page 21.
Belt tension devic
Function of the belt ten
During a frontal collision
tensioned automatically
The seat belts for the front occ
Sensors will trigger the belt te
and rear collisions only if the
tightens the seat belts, reduc
The belt tension device can be
The belt tension devices will n
side or rear collision, if the ve
forces act on the front, side or
Note If the belt tension devices
normal and is no indication th
The relevant safety require
components of the system are
these regulations and will be
Service and disposal of
The belt tension devices are c
in the seats of your vehicle. If
and install parts of the system
belt may be damaged. The co
dent, the belt tension devices
Seat belts 27
Safety Fir Technical Data
cordoba_ingles Seite 27 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
So that the effectiveness of the belt tension device is not reduced and that
removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regula-
tions, which are known to the qualified workshops, must be observed.
WARNING
If repairs are not carried out by a professional, or if the belt tension devices are used incorrectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries increases. The belt tension devices may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong circumstances.
Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the belt tension devices or seat belts.
The belt tension device and seat belt including its automatic retractor cannot be repaired.
Any work on the belt tension devices and seat belts, including the removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other repair work, must be performed by a qualified workshop only.
The belt tension devices will only provide protection for one accident and must be changed it they have been activated.
Airbag system28
g may inflict critical or fatal injuries upon the
larly to children.
possible distance between yourself and the
t airbags can completely deploy when trig-
m protection.
r triggering the airbag are the type of accident,
hicle speed.
ered depends primarily on the vehicle deceler-
ollision and detected by the control unit. If the
during the collision and measured by the
specified reference values, the front, side
be triggered. Take into account that the visible
an accident, for whatever reason, are not an
gs were triggered.
orrectly or assuming an incorrect sitting posi- al injuries.
hildren, who are not properly belted can s if the airbag is triggered. You should always years of age on the rear seat. Never transport are not restrained or the restraint system is ht.
eat belt or if you lean forward or to the side or osition, the risk of injury is increased risk of injury will be further increased if you ag.
y from an inflating airbag, always wear the .
cordoba_ingles Seite 28 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Airbag system
Brief introduction
Why wear a seat belt and assume the correct sitting position?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the
seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting
position must be assumed.
For your own safety and the safety of the passengers, please ensure
the following before you drive:
Always wear the seat belt properly page 17.
Adjust the driver seat and the steering wheel correctly page 9.
Adjust the front passenger seat correctly page 10.
Adjust the head restraint correctly page 12.
Use the correct child restraint system to protect children in your
vehicle page 43.
The airbag deploys in fractions of a second and with a high velocity. If you
have assumed an incorrect seating position at that moment, you could
sustain critical injuries. Therefore, it is essential that all occupants maintain
a correct sitting position while travelling.
Braking heavily the moment before an accident may cause an occupant not
wearing a seat belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag.
In this case, the inflating airba
occupant. This applies particu
Always maintain the greatest
front airbag. This way, the fron
gered, providing their maximu
The most important factors fo
the angle of impact and the ve
Whether the airbags are trigg
ation rate resulting from the c
vehicle deceleration occurring
control unit remains below the
and/or curtain airbag will not
damage in a vehicle following
indication as to why the airba
WARNING
Wearing the seat belt inc tion can lead to critical or fat
All occupants, including c sustain critical or fatal injurie transport all children up to 12 children in the vehicle if they not appropriate for their weig
If you are not wearing a s assume an incorrect sitting p substantially. This increased are struck by an inflating airb
To reduce the risk of injur seat belt properly page 17
Airbag system 29
Safety Fir Technical Data
ger airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat gainst the door, the roof or the backrest.
tances, it should be necessary to transport a at on the front passenger seat, it is absolutely he following safety measures:
enger airbag page 41, Deactivating
e approved by the child seat manufacturer for r seat with front or side airbag.
instructions of the child seat manufacturer the warnings page 43, Child safety.
ling the child seat, push the front passenger ar so that the greatest possible distance to the s ensured.
s prevent the front passenger seat from being .
ont passenger seat must be in an upright
g and belt tension device system
itors the airbag and belt tension
ll airbags and belt tension devices in the
its and wiring connections.
cordoba_ingles Seite 29 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Always properly adjust the front seats.
The danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger seat
Rear-facing child seats must never be used on the front
passenger seat when the front passenger airbag is enabled.
An enabled front airbag on the front passenger side is potentially a major
danger to a child. The front passenger seat is life threatening to a child if you
transport the child in a rear-facing child seat. You should always transport all
children up to 12 years of age on the rear seat.
If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, an inflating
airbag can strike it with such great force that critical or fatal injuries may
result.
Therefore we urgently recommend that you transport children on the rear
seats. That is the safest place in the vehicle for children. Alternatively, the
front passenger airbag can be disabled with a key-operated switch
page 41. When transporting children, use a child seat appropriate to the
age and size of each child page 43.
For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off,
an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.
WARNING
If a child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, the risk to the child of sustaining critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases.
Never secure a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the front passenger airbag is enabled. The child can suffer critical or fatal inju- ries when the front passenger airbag is triggered.
An inflating front passen and hurl it with great force a
If, under special circums child in a rear-facing child se essential that you observe t
Disable the front pass airbags*.
The child seat must b use on a front passenge
Follow the installation and absolutely observe
Before properly instal seat all the way to the re front passenger airbag i
Ensure that no object pushed completely back
The backrest of the fr position.
Warning lamp for airba
This warning lamp mon
device system.
The warning lamp monitors a
vehicle, including control un
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Airbag system30
ay be that, in the event of an accident, the
oes not inflate at all.
nts must be observed when the vehicle or
scrapped. The specialist workshops and the
miliar with these requirements.
ut by a professional, or if the airbags are used or fatal injuries is increased. The airbags may in the wrong circumstances.
hing on the steering wheel hub or the soft unit on the passenger side of the dashboard, y them in any way.
ch any objects such as cup holders or tele- aces covering the airbag units.
el or dash panel, you may use only a dry cloth Never clean the dash panel and surface of the s containing solvents. Solvents cause the the airbag inflates, disintegrating plastic njuries.
djust, remove or install parts of the airbag
stem or removal and installation of the airbag (such as repairs to the steering wheel) should fied workshop. Qualified workshops have the
ation and qualified personnel.
hat you go to a qualified workshop for all work
front bumper or the body.
ction for one accident only, if they have been ced.
cordoba_ingles Seite 30 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Monitoring of airbag and belt tension device system
The functionality of the airbag and belt tension device system is constantly
monitored electronically. The warning lamp will light up for a few seconds
every time the ignition is switched on (self-diagnosis).
The system must be checked when the warning lamp :
does not come on when the ignition is switched on,
does not go out about 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
goes out and then comes on again after the ignition is switched on,
or if it comes on or flickers while the car is moving.
In the event of a malfunction, the warning lamp remains on continuously.
Have the airbag system inspected immediately by a qualified workshop.
If one airbag has been disconnected by the Authorised Service Centre, the
indicator flashes for some seconds after the self diagnosis and will turn off if
there is no fault.
WARNING
If there is a malfunction, the airbag and belt tension device system cannot properly perform its protective function.
If a malfunction should occur, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a risk that, in the event of an acci- dent, the airbag system and belt tension devices may not be triggered, or may not be triggered correctly.
Repair, care and disposal of the airbags
The parts of the airbag system are installed in various places in your vehicle.
If you work on the airbag system or remove and install parts of the system
when performing other repair work, parts of the airbag system may be
damaged. The consequence m
airbag inflates incorrectly or d
The relevant safety requireme
components of the airbag are
Vehicle disposal centres are fa
WARNING
If repairs are not carried o incorrectly, the risk of severe fail to inflate, or could inflate
Do not cover or stick anyt plastic surface of the airbag and do not obstruct or modif
It is important not to atta phone mountings to the surf
To clean the steering whe or one moistened with water. airbag module with cleanser surface to become porous. If parts can cause substantial i
Never attempt to repair, a system.
Any work on the airbag sy components for other repairs be performed only by a quali necessary tools, repair inform
We urgently recommend t on the airbag system.
Never attempt to alter the
The airbags provide prote deployed they must be repla
Airbag system 31
Safety Fir Technical Data
r is located in the steering wheel fig. 17 and
nger is located in the dash panel fig. 18.
text AIRBAG.
elts, the front airbag system gives the front
ion for the head and chest in the event of a
ge 34, Safety notes on front airbag system.
nction of restraining the occupants, the seat
front passenger in a position where the airbags
tion in a frontal collision.
bstitute for seat belts, but is an integral part of
safety system. Please bear in mind that the
ffectively when the occupants are wearing their
adjusted the head restraints properly. For this
o wear the seat belts at all times - not only
w in most countries, but also for your safety
irbag system are:
monitoring system (control unit),
ag with gas generator) for the driver and front
dash panel insert page 29.
g system is monitored electronically. The airbag
r a few seconds every time the ignition is
if the warning lamp
he ignition is switched on page 29,
econds after the ignition is switched on,
on again after the ignition is switched on,
s while the car is moving.
cordoba_ingles Seite 31 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Front airbags
Description of front airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The front airbag for the drive
the airbag for the front passe
Airbags are identified by the
In conjunction with the seat b
occupants additional protect
severe frontal collision pa
In addition to their normal fu
belts also hold the driver and
can provide maximum protec
The airbag system is not a su
the vehicle's overall passive
airbag system can only work e
seat belts correctly and have
reason, it is most important t
because this is required by la
page 17, Introduction.
The main parts of the front a
an electronic control and
the two front airbags (airb
passenger,
a warning lamp in the
The functionality of the airba
warning lamp will light up fo
switched on (self-diagnosis).
There is a fault in the system
does not come on when t
does not go out about 4 s
goes out and then comes
or if it comes on or flicker
Fig. 17 Driver airbag located in steering wheel
Fig. 18 Front passenger airbag located in dash panel
Airbag system32
s
the risk of head or chest injury.
so that the airbags for the driver and front
evere frontal collision.
e front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-
the airbags fill with a propellant gas and
d front passenger fig. 19. The fully deployed
ovement of the front occupants and help to
head and the upper part of the body.
ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
ts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
ected by the airbag. Once the impact has been
sufficiently for the front occupants to see
Fig. 19 Inflated front airbags
cordoba_ingles Seite 32 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
The front airbag system will not be triggered if:
if the ignition is switched off,
during a minor frontal collision,
during a minor side collision,
during a rear-end collision,
or if the vehicle rolls.
WARNING
The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 9, Proper sitting position for occu- pants.
If a fault should occur in the airbag system, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a frontal collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Function of front airbag
Inflated airbags reduce
The airbag system is designed
passenger are triggered in a s
In certain types of accident th
gered together.
When the system is triggered,
deploy in front of the driver an
airbags cushion the forward m
reduce the risk of injury to the
The special design of the airb
lant gas when an occupant pu
chest are surrounded and prot
absorbed, the airbag deflates
forward.
Airbag system 33
Safety Fir Technical Data
deploys. This is normal and is no indication
hicle.
g. 20 Airbag covers reacting when the airbags are trig- red
cordoba_ingles Seite 33 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags
have to deploy extremely rapidly (within fractions of a second). A fine dust
may develop when the airbag
that there was a fire in the ve
The function of the airbag covers if the airbags are triggered
The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel or dash panel when the driver
and front passenger airbags deploy fig. 20. The airbag covers remain
connected to the steering wheel or the dash panel.
Fi ge
Airbag system34
ags
t a substitute for the seat belts.
the driver seat and front passenger seat back-
are identified by the text AIRBAG in the upper
lts, the side airbag system gives the front seat
on for the upper body in the event of a severe
fety notes on the operation of the side airbag
ags reduce the risk of injury to passengers on
the body facing the impact. In addition to their
the occupants in a collision, the seat belts also
ont seats in a position where the side airbags
ion.
Fig. 21 Side airbag in driver seat
cordoba_ingles Seite 34 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Safety notes on front airbag system
If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce the
risk of injury in many kinds of accident.
WARNING
It is important for the driver and front passenger to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. If the minimum safe distance is not maintained, the airbags will not protect the occupants suitably and there is a risk of fatal injury! In addition, the front seats and head restraints must always be positioned correctly for the height of the occupant.
If you are not wearing a seat belt or if you lean forward or to the side or assume an incorrect sitting position, the risk of injury is increased substantially. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.
Never let a child travel on the front seat without an appropriate restraint system. If the airbag is triggered in an accident, children can sustain serious or fatal injuries from the airbag as it inflates page 43, Child safety.
Occupants sitting in the front of the vehicle must never carry any objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags, or allow children or other passengers to travel in this position.
The airbags provide protection for one accident only, if they have been deployed they must be replaced.
It is also important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
Side airbags
Description of side airb
The airbag system is no
The side airbags are located in
rests fig. 21. The locations
region of the backrests.
In conjunction with the seat be
occupants additional protecti
side collision page 37, Sa
system.
In a side collision the side airb
the front seats to the areas of
normal function of protecting
hold the passengers on the fr
can provide maximum protect
Airbag system 35
Safety Fir Technical Data
f the loudspeakers in the door panels have oles left by the loudspeakers have been
enings are closed or covered if loudspeakers d in the interior door panels.
he doors should be made in a qualified author-
gs can only provide maximum protection if the tly page 9, Proper sitting position for occu-
the airbag system, have the system checked orkshop. Otherwise there is a danger that ystem may fail to trigger, or not trigger
cordoba_ingles Seite 35 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but is an integral part of
the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts. For this reason, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all
times - not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for
your safety page 17, Introduction.
The side airbag system will not be triggered
if the ignition is switched off,
during a minor side collision,
during a minor frontal collision,
during a rear-end collision,
or if the vehicle rolls.
The main parts of the airbag system are
an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit),
the side airbags in the sides of the backrests of the front seats,
a warning lamp in the dash panel insert page 29.
The functionality of the airbag system is monitored electronically. The airbag
warning lamp will light up for approx. 4 seconds every time the ignition is
switched on (self-diagnosis).
WARNING
In a side-on collision, the side airbags will not work, if the sensors do not correctly measure the pressure increase on the interior of the doors, due to air escaping through the areas with holes or openings in the door panel.
Never drive the vehicle if the interior panels have been removed.
Never drive if the interior door panels have been removed or if the panels have not been correctly fitted.
Never drive the vehicle i been removed, unless the h correctly closed.
Always check that the op or other equipment are fitte
Any work carried out to t ised workshop.
The seat belts and airba occupants are seated correc pants.
If a fault should occur in immediately by a qualified w during a side collision, the s correctly.
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system36
ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
ts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
tected by the airbag.
cordoba_ingles Seite 36 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Function of side airbags
Inflated airbags can reduce the risk of head or chest injury in
many side impact collisions.
In some side collisions the side airbag is triggered on the impact side of the
vehicle fig. 22.
In certain types of accident the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-
gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas.
In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags
have to deploy extremely rapidly (within fractions of a second). A fine dust
may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and is no indication
that there was a fire in the vehicle.
The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the occupants of the
front seats and help to reduce the risk of injury to the upper body.
The special design of the airb
lant gas when an occupant pu
chest are surrounded and pro
Fig. 22 Inflated side airbag on left side of vehicle
Airbag system 37
Safety Fir Technical Data
n incorrect sitting position, they expose them- f injury in the event of an accident. This is
hild is travelling on the front passenger seat ggered in an accident; this could have critical ious injury or death page 43, Child safety.
bag system or removal and installation of the r repairs (such as removal of the front seat) qualified workshop. Otherwise, a fault may be n of the airbag system.
y components of the airbag system in any way.
s are managed through sensors located in the ensure the correct functioning of the side and ors nor the door panels should be modified in akers). If the front door is damaged in any way, orking of the system. All work carried out on in a qualified workshop.
cordoba_ingles Seite 37 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag system
If airbags are used correctly, they can considerably reduce the
risk of injury in side impact collisions.
WARNING
If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at greater risk of injury should the side airbag system be triggered in an accident.
In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts while travelling.
Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags, or allow children or other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to attach any accessories (such as cup holders) to the doors. This would impair the protection offered by the side airbags.
The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the backrest bolster because the system may be damaged. In this case the side airbags would not be triggered.
Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over the driver seat or front passenger seat unless the covers have been expressly approved for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag deploys from the side of the backrest, the use of non-approved seat covers would obstruct the side airbag seriously reducing the airbag's effectiveness page 162, Accessories, parts replacement and modifications.
Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a qualified workshop.
The airbags provide protection for one accident only, if they have been deployed they must be replaced.
When children assume a selves to an increased risk o particularly the case if the c and the airbag system is tri consequences including ser
Any work on the side air airbag components for othe should only be performed by introduced into the operatio
Do not attempt to modif
The side and head airbag interior of the front doors. To head airbags neither the do any way (e.g. fitting loudspe this may affect the correct w the front door must be made
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system38
w in most countries, but also for your safety
airbag system are:
onitoring system (control unit),
s with gas generator) for the driver, front
the rear seats,
ash panel insert page 29.
system is monitored electronically.
l not be triggered
off,
. 23 Location of left curtain airbag
cordoba_ingles Seite 38 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Curtain airbags
Description of curtain airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The curtain airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors
fig. 23 and are identified with the text AIRBAG.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the curtain airbag system gives the occu-
pants additional protection for the head and upper body in the event of a
severe side collision page 39, Safety notes on the operation of the
curtain airbag system.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but is an integral part of
the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. For this
reason, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times - not only
because this is required by la
page 17, Introduction.
The main parts of the curtain
an electronic control and m
the curtain airbags (airbag
passenger and passengers on
a warning lamp in the d
The functionality of the airbag
The curtain airbag system wil
if the ignition is switched
Fig
Airbag system 39
Safety Fir Technical Data
he curtain airbag is triggered on the impact side
e front, side and curtain airbags may be trig-
, the airbag is filled with propellant gas. In the
rs the side windows and door pillars.
d extra protection in an accident, the airbags
idly (within fractions of a second). A fine dust
deploys. This is normal and is no indication
hicle.
shion the movement of the front occupants and
ry to the upper body.
ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
uts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
tected by the airbag.
eration of the curtain airbag system
ctly, they can considerably reduce the
inds of accident.
irbags to provide their maximum protection, on must always be maintained with seat belts
ead air bag must be disconnected in those ger compartment separation screen. See an make this adjustment.
cordoba_ingles Seite 39 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
during a frontal collision,
during a rear-end collision,
if the vehicle rolls,
or during a minor frontal collision.
WARNING
If a fault should occur in the airbag system, have the system checked imme- diately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Function of curtain airbags
Fully inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury in
a side collision.
During some side collisions t
of the vehicle fig. 24.
In certain types of accident th
gered together.
When the system is triggered
process, the curtain bag cove
In order to provide the desire
have to deploy extremely rap
may develop when the airbag
that there was a fire in the ve
The fully deployed airbags cu
help to reduce the risk of inju
The special design of the airb
lant gas when an occupant p
chest are surrounded and pro
Safety notes on the op
If you use airbags corre
risk of injury in many k
WARNING
In order for the curtain a the prescribed sitting positi while travelling.
For safety reasons, the h vehicles fitted with a passen Authorised Service Centre to
Fig. 24 Deployed curtain airbags
Airbag system40
cordoba_ingles Seite 40 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the occu- pants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the curtain airbags so that the curtain airbag can deploy without restriction and provide the greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have not been expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side windows page 162, Accessories, parts replacement and modifica- tions.
The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. When using the coat hooks, do not hang the clothes on coat hangers.
The airbags provide protection for one accident only, if they have been deployed they must be replaced.
Any work on the curtain airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lining) should only be performed by qualified workshop. Otherwise, a fault may be introduced into the operation of the airbag system.
Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct functioning of the side and head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged in any way, this may affect the correct working of the system. All work carried out on the front door must be made in a qualified workshop.
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system 41
Safety Fir Technical Data
g is deactivated, this means that only the
re deactivated. All the other airbags in the
.
r airbag
h in the key operated switch in the glove
F fig. 25.
lamp AIRBAG OFF in the dash panel
when the ignition is switched on.
airbag
h in the key-operated switch in the glove
fig. 25.
Fig. 26 Warning lamp for deactivated passenger airbag in centre console
cordoba_ingles Seite 41 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Deactivating airbags*
Disabling front passenger airbag
If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat,
the front passenger front and side airbags must be disabled.
When the passenger airba
frontal and side airbags a
vehicle remain functional
Disabling front passenge
Switch off ignition.
Turn the ignition switc
box to the position OF
Check that the warning
fig. 26 remains lit
Enabling front passenger
Switch off ignition.
Turn the ignition switc
box to the position ON
Fig. 25 In the glove box there is key switch for disabling and enabling the airbags on the front passenger side
Airbag system42
ey to activate / deactivate the passenger nger frontal and side airbag will be activated bag on the passenger side will remain
cordoba_ingles Seite 42 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Check that the warning lamp AIRBAG OFF in the dash panel
does page 41, fig. 26 not light up when the ignition is
switched on .
WARNING
The driver is responsible for the proper position of the key-operated switch.
You should deactivate the front passenger airbag only if you have to use a rear-facing child seat in exceptional cases page 43, Child safety.
Never install a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. Risk of potentially fatal inju- ries to the child! However, if it is necessary in exceptional circumstances to transport a child in a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat, you must always disable the front passenger airbag.
As soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger seat, enable the front passenger airbag again.
Only deactivate the passenger airbag when the ignition is off, other- wise a fault may occur in the airbag system, this will create a danger that in case of an accident, the airbag does not deploy properly or does not deploy at all.
If, when the front passenger airbag is deactivated, the warning light AIRBAG OFF of the dash panel does not stay lit, it may be that the airbag system is faulty:
Have the airbag system inspected immediately by a qualified work- shop.
Do not use a child seat on the front passenger seat! The front passenger airbag could be triggered despite the fact that there is a fault in the system. A child could sustain serious or fatal injuries.
It is not certain whether the front passenger airbag will deploy during an accident! Inform your passengers of this.
When using the ignition k frontal airbag, only the passe / deactivated. The curtain air active.
WARNING (continued)
Child safety 43
Safety Fir Technical Data
ude the manufacturer's directions for child seat
always keep them in the vehicle.
cordoba_ingles Seite 43 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Child safety
Brief introduction
Introduction
Statistics show that children are generally safer on the rear
seat than on the front passenger seat.
We recommend that children under 12 years of age be transported on the rear
seats. Children travelling on the rear seat must use a child restraint system or
the seat belts provided, depending on their age, height and weight. For
safety reasons, the child restraint system should be installed in the centre of
the rear seat or behind the front passenger's seat.
The physical principles involved and the forces acting in a collision apply to
children just as much as adults page 19, Why wear seat belts?. But
unlike adults, children do not have fully developed muscle and bone struc-
tures. This means that children are subject to a greater risk of injury.
To reduce this risk, children must always use special child restraint systems
when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety products from the SEAT Genuine Acces-
sories Program including systems for all ages made by Peke1).
These systems have been especially designed and approved, complying with
the ECE-R44. regulation.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats. Always read and observe
page 44, Safety notes on using child seats.
We recommend that you incl
use in the vehicle wallet and
1) Not for all countries
Child safety44
ransported in a vehicle without being properly eel on a seat while travelling. In an accident, gh the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries pants.
roper sitting position when the car is moving, reater risk of injury during a sudden braking This is particularly the case if the child is trav- seat and the airbag system is triggered in an sequences including serious injury or death.
protect your child!
ervised in a child seat or alone in the vehicle.
nditions, it may become extremely hot or cold e fatal.
n 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal seat system, as this could cause injuries to the ring a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an
bing to become twisted or jammed, or to rub
ts can cause injuries even in a minor collision es.
ximum protection only when the belt web is 22, Seat belts.
y a child seat page 45, Child seats.
cordoba_ingles Seite 44 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Safety notes on using child seats
Proper use of child seats substantially reduces the risk of
injury in an accident!
As the driver, you are responsible for any children you transport in
your vehicle.
Protect your children by properly using appropriate child seats
page 45.
Always ensure that the belt webbing is properly positioned
according to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
child seat.
When travelling, do not allow children to distract you from traffic.
Take breaks regularly during long trips. Take a break at least
every two hours.
WARNING
Never install a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. Risk of potentially fatal inju- ries to the child! If it is necessary, in exceptional circumstances, to trans- port a child on the front passenger seat, always disable the front passenger airbag page 41, Deactivating airbags*.
For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off, an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.
All passengers, especially children, must assume the proper sitting position and be properly belted in while travelling.
Never hold children or babies on your lap, this can result in potentially fatal injuries to the child!
Never allow a child to be t secured, or to stand up or kn the child could be flung throu to themselves and other occu
If children assume an imp they expose themselves to g manoeuvre or in an accident. elling on the front passenger accident; this could have con
A suitable child seat can
Never leave a child unsup
Depending on weather co inside the vehicle. This can b
Children who are less tha belt without a child restraint abdominal and neck areas du accident.
Do not allow the belt web on any sharp edges.
Incorrectly worn seat bel or sudden braking manoeuvr
The seat belt provides ma properly positioned page
Only one child may occup
WARNING (continued)
Child safety 45
Safety Fir Technical Data
eats
d a correctly adjusted seat belt can
ld.
out 9 months old and 10 kg in weight the most
aring in the illustration fig. 27.
out 18 months old and 13 kg in weight the most
aring in the illustration.
tructions and observe any statutory require-
sing child seats.
ude the manufacturer's directions for child seat
always keep them in the vehicle.
formation and warnings concerning the use of notes on using child seats on page 44.
Fig. 27 A group 0 rear- facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.
cordoba_ingles Seite 45 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Child seats
Categorisation of child seats into groups
Use only child seats that are officially approved and suitable
for the child.
Child seats are covered by the European standard ECE R 44 (issued by the
Economic Commission of Europe).
The child seats are grouped into 5 categories:
Group 0: Up to 10 kg
Group 0+: up to 13 kg
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg
Group 3: from 22 to 36 kg
Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R 44 standard
bear the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number
below it).
Group 0 and 0+ child s
A suitable child seat an
help to protect your chi
Group 0: For babies from ab
suitable seats are those appe
Group 0+: For babies from ab
suitable seats are those appe
Follow the manufacturer's ins
ments when installing and u
We recommend that you incl
use in the vehicle wallet and
WARNING
Read and always observe in child seats in Safety
Child safety46
ts
a correctly adjusted seat belt can
d.
tructions and observe any statutory require-
ing child seats.
de the manufacturer's directions for child seat
lways keep them in the vehicle.
weighing between 15 and 25 kg are best
ts in conjunction with properly adjusted seat
ighing between 22 and 36 kg but less than 1.5
by seat cushions with head restraints in
n seat belts fig. 29.
Fig. 29 Forward-facing child seat installed on rear seat.
cordoba_ingles Seite 46 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Group 1 child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help to protect your child.
Child seats using the ISOFIX system or seats in which the child faces the
rear of the car are most appropriate for babies and small children weighing
between 9 and 18 kg.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend that you include the manufacturer's directions for child seat
use in the vehicle wallet and always keep them in the vehicle.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 44.
Group 2 and 3 child sea
A suitable child seat and
help to protect your chil
Follow the manufacturer's ins
ments when installing and us
We recommend that you inclu
use in the vehicle wallet and a
Group 2 child seats
Children under 7 years of age
protected by group 2 child sea
belts.
Group 3 child seats
Children over 7 years of age we
metres tall are best protected
conjunction with properly wor
Fig. 28 A category 1 forward-facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.
Child safety 47
Safety Fir Technical Data
closely. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take eat belts.
information and warnings concerning the use ty notes on using child seats on page 44.
3 can be secured with a seat belt.
eats with the ISOFIX system can be secured to
ithout seat belts page 48.
t as far to the rear as possible, as high as
ctivate the airbag.
stems with anchorageISOFIX
d to children of this age group.
cations
outer Rear centre
U
U
L U
F UF
cordoba_ingles Seite 47 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
WARNING
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie approximately on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. The seat belt must lie close to the torso. The lap belt part must lie across the pelvis, not across
the stomach, and always fit up any slack page 22, S
Read and always observe of child seats in Safe
Securing child seats
Ways to secure a child seat
A child seat can be secured differently on the rear seat and on the front passenger seat.
You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or front passenger seat in the
following ways:
Child seats in groups 0 to
Group 0, 0+ and 1 child s
the ISOFIX retaining rings w
U: Suitable for universal approved retention systems for use with this age
group (universal retention systems are those which are fastened using
an adult seat belt)
UF Suitable for universal approved retention systems facing forwards for
use in this agegroup.
* Move the passenger sea
possible and always dea
L: Suitable for retention sy
X Seat position is not suite
WARNING (continued)
Weight class Weight Seat lo
Front passenger Rear
Group 0 <10 kg U* U
Group 0+ <13 kg U* U
Group 1 9-18 kg U* U/
Group 2 / 3 15-36 kg X U
Child safety48
e child seat, please be sure to follow the
s.
rear as it will go.
o the ISOFIX retaining rings until the
to engage securely.
e child seat to ensure that it is secure.
re fitted on each rear seat. The ISOFIX
the seat frames.
ntings are available from the Authorised
signed only for use with ISOFIX child seats.
without the ISOFIX system, retaining belts gs this can result in potentially fatal injuries
t is secured correctly using the ISOFIX
cordoba_ingles Seite 48 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
WARNING
When travelling, children must be secured in the vehicle with a restraint system suitable for age, weight and size.
Never install a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. Risk of potentially fatal inju- ries to the child! If it is necessary in exceptional cases to transport a child on the front passenger seat, you must always disable the front passenger airbag page 41, Deactivating airbags*.
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 44.
Securing child seat with the ISOFIX system
The child seat with ISOFIX system can be secured quickly,
easily and safely on the rear outer seats using the system
When removing or fitting th
manufacturer's instruction
Move the seat as far to
Press the child seat ont
child seat can be heard
Pull on both sides of th
Two ISOFIX retaining rings a
retaining rings are attached to
Child seats with ISOFIX mou
Service Centres.
WARNING
The retaining rings are de
Never secure child seats or objects to the fastening rin to the child!
Ensure that the child sea anchors.
Fig. 30 ISOFIX securing rings
49
Safety Fir Technical Data
cordoba_ingles Seite 49 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
50
Fig. 3
cordoba_ingles Seite 50 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
1 Instrument panel
Cockpit 51
Safety Fir Technical Data
igation system*
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
partment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
r/socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
rbox lever * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lever* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ctric wing mirrors* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ent listed here are fitted only on certain models
31
105
112
115
118
107
133
129, 128
14
122
105
171
97
72
83
cordoba_ingles Seite 51 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Operating instructions
Cockpit
Overview
Overview of the instrument panel
This overview will help you to familiarise yourself with the
controls and displays quickly.
Door release lever
Air vent
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Light dimmer for instrument panel lighting* . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight range control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn signal and dipped beam lever and cruise control system*
Instrument panel and warning lights:
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indication lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horn (works only when the ignition is on)/ and driver front
airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering and starter lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen wiper and operation of the multi-function display*
Switch for hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch for heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag disconnected warning light* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cup holder* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio casing*/Radio nav
Passenger airbag* . . .
Glove box/Stowage com
Switches for:
Heating and ventilatio
Air conditioning* . .
Climatronic* . . . . . .
Ashtray/ cigarette lighte
Handbrake lever . . . . .
Automatic / manual gea
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering column control
Stowage compartment
Bonnet release lever . .
Control for adjusting ele
Central locking button*
Electric window controls
Note Some of the items of equipm
or are optional extras.
A1
A2
A3 88
A4 89
A5 89
A6 91, 134
A7
52
60
A8
28
A9 124
A10 94, 56
A11 90
A12 89
A13 29
A14 106
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A27
A28
Cockpit52
perature display*/Multifunction
ever position page 58
vice interval display* page 55
cordoba_ingles Seite 52 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Instruments
Instrument overview
The instruments display the vehicle operating status.
Fig. 32 Detail of the dash panel: Instruments
The layout of the instruments depends upon the model and engine.
Rev counter* page 53
Coolant temperature gauge page 53
Fuel gauge page 54
Speedometer page 54
Digital clock*/Outside tem
display page 54
Display field for selector l
Distance display with ser
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
Cockpit 53
Safety Fir Technical Data
ature display
ngine coolant temperature.
d heavy engine loads fig. 33.
the needle should be in the middle section of
ay also rise when the engine is working hard,
peratures. This is no cause for concern, as long
s not light up on the instrument panel.
0, fig. 40 will light up and a buzzer will be
arning zone. Stop the car and switch off the el page 177 .
rrect do not continue driving. You should obtain
Fig. 33 Engine coolant temperature
A2
cordoba_ingles Seite 53 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Rev counter
The rev. counter displays the engine speed in revolutions per
minute.
The start of the red zone on the dial page 52, fig. 32 indicates the
maximum engine speed which may be used briefly when the engine is warm
and after it has been run in properly. However, it is advisable to change up a
gear or move the selector lever to D (or lift your foot off the accelerator) before
the needle reaches the red zone.
Caution The rev counter needle must never enter the red zone on the scale. Risk of
engine damage.
For the sake of the environment Changing up a gear early will help you to save fuel and minimise engine
noise.
Engine coolant temper
This gauge shows the e
Needle in cold zone
Avoid high engine speeds an
Needle in normal zone
In normal driving conditions,
the scale. The temperature m
especially at high outside tem
as the warning lamp doe
Needle in warning zone
The warning lamp* page 6
heard if the needle is in the w
engine. Check the coolant lev
Even if the coolant level is co
technical assistance.
A4
AA
AB
AC
AC
Cockpit54
red area of the reserve zone fig. 34, the
acoustic signal will soundreminding the driver re still about 7 litres of fuel in the tank.
with a digital odometer and a trip counter, in
display.
the instructions shown on page 143 should
the instrument panel
page 52, fig. 32 anti-clockwise to
r. If the knob is turned briefly anti-clock-
nce one hour further.
lockwise to the limit stop to set the
turned briefly clockwise the clock will
rther.
A5
cordoba_ingles Seite 54 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, always bear in mind the safety warnings page 169.
Caution Accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect of the coolant. At
high outside temperatures and high engine loads, there is a risk of the
engine overheating.
Fuel gauge and reserve indicator
Details of the instrument panel: Fuel gauge
The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 45 litres.
When the needle reaches the
warning lamp will light and an
to refuel. At this point there a
Speedometer
The speedometer is equipped
addition to a service intervals
During the running-in period,
be followed
Digital display in
Digital clock *
Turn the setting knob the stop to set the hou
wise the clock will adva
Turn the setting knob c
minutes. If the knob is
advance one minute fu Fig. 34 Fuel gauge
Cockpit 55
Safety Fir Technical Data
witched on or the engine is running. The normal
essing the reset button on the trip counter or by
the MFI page 56, fig. 35 .
, you can call up the current service message by
t knob for 2 seconds.
d by a minus sign in front of the mileage or day
AB
cordoba_ingles Seite 55 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Ambient temperature display*
The outside temperature is displayed when the ignition is
switched on.
At temperatures between +6C to -7C , in addition to the outside tempera-
ture, an ice crystal is displayed and if travel speed is over 10 km/h an acoustic
buzzer is heard.
The illumination of the crystal symbol aims to warn the driver of the risk of ice, so that he/she proceeds with due care.
When the vehicle is stationary or travelling at very low speeds, the tempera-
ture displayed may be slightly higher than the actual outside temperature as
a result of heat coming from the engine.
Mileage display or Service Interval Display
Distance display
The left-hand counter in the display registers the total amount of distance
covered by the vehicle.
The right-hand counter registers the short journeys. The last digit indicates
steps of 100 metres. The trip recorder counter may be reset by the reset
button page 52, fig. 32 .
Service interval display
A Service pre-warning will appear in the mileage displays if a service is due
soon. A spanner symbol appears and the display km with the distance
that can be driven until the next service appointment is due. The display will
change after approximately 10 seconds. A clock symbol appears and the
number of days until the service appointment should be carried out. The
following information text displayed in the instrument panel display: SERV. IN ... KM OR ... DAYS. The service message will disappear approximately 20
seconds after the ignition is s
display can be resumed by pr
pressing the rocker switch of
With the ignition switched on
pressing the trip counter rese
An overdue service is indicate
information.
A6
Cockpit56
is equipped with two automatic memo-
- Total journey memory. The selected
he upper right-hand corner of the display.
ed on, briefly press the button fig. 35
iper lever to move between the two
you would like to reset.
on the windscreen wiper lever for at
travel and consumption data from the moment
til it is switched off. If the journey is continued
off the ignition, the new values will be added to
ory. The memory will automatically be deleted
r more than two hours.
ollects the journey data for any number of indi-
ition is switched off for longer than two hours)
9 minutes travel time, 9999 miles distance trav-
sumed. The memory will automatically be
lues is reached.
AA
cordoba_ingles Seite 56 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Display with multi-function display (MFD)*
The multi-function display (MFD) shows you diverse journey
and consumption data.
The multi-function display
ries: 1 - Trip memory and 2 memory will be shown in t
Selecting memory
With the ignition switch
on the windscreen w
memories.
Resetting the memory
Select the memory that
Press and hold button
least 2 seconds.
The trip memory 1collects the
the ignition is switched on un
within two hours of switching
the existing trip recorder mem
if the journey is interrupted fo
The total journey memory 2 c
vidual journeys (even if the ign
up to a total of 99 hours and 5
elled and 999 litres of fuel con
deleted if one of the named va
Fig. 35 Windscreen wiper and washer lever: Button A and rocker switch B
Fig. 36 Digital screen on the instrument panel: outside temperature display
AA
Cockpit 57
Safety Fir Technical Data
stance you can travel with the remaining fuel)
n
en the ignition is switched off. The clock can be
ng button below the rev counter digital clock.
t of time which has elapsed since the ignition
n both memories is 99 hours and 59 minutes.
ly be deleted once this value has been reached.
own after a distance of approximately 100
ashes will appear in the display until that time.
very 5 seconds whilst the vehicle is in motion.
ce travelled since the ignition was switched on.
both memories is 9999 miles. The memory will
e this value has been reached.
sing the figures for tank content and current fuel
ar the vehicle can travel using the same condi-
cordoba_ingles Seite 57 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Displays in the multi-function display (MFD)*
You can switch between the following displays in the multi-function display
(MFD) by operating the rocker switch fig. 37 on the windscreen wiper
lever.
Memory displays
Time
Journey duration
Average speed
Distance
Distance to empty (the di
Average fuel consumptio
Current fuel consumption
Time
The time is also displayed wh
set with the right-hand rotati
min - Journey duration
The display shows the amoun
was switched on.
The maximum display value i
The memory will automatical
mph - Average speed
The average speed will be sh
metres has been travelled. D
The display will be updated e
km - Distance travelled
The display shows the distan
The maximum display value in
automatically be deleted onc
km - Fuel range
The fuel range is calculated u
consumption. It shows how f
tions as a reference.
Fig. 37 Windscreen wiper and washer lever: Button A and rocker switch B
Fig. 38 Digital screen on the instrument panel: outside temperature display
AB
Cockpit58
r lever position*
gearbox selector lever is shown on the display
ice Interval Display
lay registers the total distance covered by the
e short journeys. The last digit indicates steps
er counter may be reset by the reset button
Fig. 39 Service interval display
cordoba_ingles Seite 58 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
litre/100km - Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption will be shown page 57, fig. 38 after a
distance of approximately 100 metres has been travelled. Dashes will appear
in the display until that time. The display will be updated every 5 seconds
whilst the vehicle is in motion. The amount of fuel used will not be shown.
ltr/100km or ltr/hr - Current fuel consumption
The display will show the current fuel consumption in litre/km whilst the
vehicle is in motion or in litre/hour when the vehicle is in a stationary position
with the engine running.
Using this display you can see how your driving style affects fuel consump-
tion page 151.
Ambient temperature display
The measurement margin extends from -45 C to +58 C. At temperatures
lower than +4 C, an ice crystal symbol is displayed and a warning
sounds if the vehicle is moving at more than 20 km/h (ice warning). This
symbol will flash for about 10 seconds and remains lit until the exterior
temperature rises above +4 C or 6 C if it was already lit.
WARNING
There could be black ice on the road surface even if the snowflake symbol is not shown. You should, for this reason, not rely exclusively on this display - Risk of accident!
Note When the vehicle is stationary or travelling at very low speeds, the tempera-
ture displayed may be slightly higher than the actual ambient temperature as
a result of the heat radiated from the engine.
Display field for selecto
The position of the automatic
page 129
Mileage display or Serv
Distance display
The upper counter in the disp
vehicle.
The lower counter registers th
of 100 metres. The trip record
page 52, fig. 32 .A6
Cockpit 59
Safety Fir Technical Data
essage should be reset in each case. By
possible to change from one message to
etween two service intervals, otherwise the
n when the battery is disconnected.
cordoba_ingles Seite 59 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Service interval display
When it is time for a service, the lower counter (trip counter) of the speedom-
eter displays the symbol of a spanner, followed by one of the following
messages:
OIL- Changing the engine oil
INSP- Maintenance service
The maintenance message switches off 3 minutes after the engine is started.
The trip counter can also be reset, by pressing the reset button for more than
0.5 seconds 2)
The Service Centre who carry out the maintenance service will reset the main-
tenance interval display on completion of the service.
We recommend that the repair and maintenance work only be carried out at Authorised Service Centres.
The service indicator can also be reset by pressing the trip counter button.
Proceed as follows:
Switch off ignition.
Keep Reset button on distance counter pressed.
Connect ignition with the Reset button pressed. The fixed mode
display appears.
After a minimum of 10 sec, release the reset button.
Caution We recommend that the resetting of the service interval indicator be carried
out in an Authorised Service Centre to avoid possible faults in the vehicle.
Note Only the desired service m
pressing the reset button it is
another.
Do not reset the display b
dispaly will be incorrect.
The values are stored eve
2) With Ignition OFF the maintenance display remains visible.
A-
A-
A-
A-
Cockpit60
. 40 Instrument panel with warning lamps. Some of warning lamps listed in this section are only fitted on tain models or are optional extras.
cordoba_ingles Seite 60 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Warning lamps
Overview of the warning lamps
The warning lamps indicate a number of different functions and possible faults.
Fig the cer
Cockpit 61
Safety Fir Technical Data
Further information
page 62
page 62
page 63
page 63
page 63
page 63
page 64
page 64
page 64
page 65
page 65
disabled page 26 page 29
page 17
page 66
cordoba_ingles Seite 61 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Item Symbol Meaning of warning and control lamps
Alternator fault
Side/dipped lights
Electro-hydraulic steering
Engine fault (petrol engine)
Glow plug system (diesel engine)
Lit up: Glow plug system switched on
Flashing: engine fault.
Turn signals in operation
Coolant level / coolant temperature
Main beam switched on
Fuel level / reserve
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) *
Parking brake applied
or low brake fluid level or
fault in brake system
Airbag or belt tension device system fault or airbag
Seat belt warning lamp*
Fault in the emission control system
A1
A2
A3
A4
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
Cockpit62
als a fault in the alternator.
when the ignition is switched on. It should go
ed running.
up while driving, the alternator is no longer
ld immediately drive to the nearest qualified
cal equipment that is not absolutely necessary
ttery.
tage is insufficient for normal vehicle
e lights
ed, side or park lights switched on. The park
nition switched off.
on pro- page 66
page 66
page 67
page 67
Further information
cordoba_ingles Seite 62 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
WARNING
Failure to observe warning lamps and warning messages can result in serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Use a warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users to your stationary vehicle so that it does not represent a danger.
The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a dangerous area! Before you open the bonnet to work on the engine or in the engine compart- ment, you must switch off the engine and allow it to cool to reduce the risk of scalding or other injuries. Read and observe the relevant warnings page 169.
Note The appropriate warning lamp for a fault will light up in vehicles without
warning or information texts in the display.
In vehicles with warning or information texts in the display, the appro-
priate warning lamp for a fault will light up and a warning or information text
will also appear in the display.
Alternator
This warning lamp sign
The warning lamp lights up
out when the engine has start
If the warning lamp lights
charging the battery. You shou
workshop.
You should avoid using electri
because this will drain the ba
If the indicator flashes the vol
operation.
Parking and dipped/sid
Optical display (green) of dipp
lights are activated with the ig
Traction control system (TCS)*/Electronic stabilisati
gram (ESP)*
Electronic immobiliser
Engine oil pressure
Trailer turn signals in operation
Item Symbol Meaning of warning and control lamps
A14
A15
A16
A17
Cockpit 63
Safety Fir Technical Data
gine fault
s up to show that the glow plugs are
there is an engine fault.
p while the glow plugs are preheating. When the
ngine should be started straight away.
ine management system while you are driving,
. Take the vehicle to an Authorised Service
nd have the engine checked.
es when the turn signals are in oper-
al is operated, either the left or right indi-
ing lamps will flash at the same time when the
itched on.
rning lamp will start flashing twice as fast.
rn signals page 91.
cordoba_ingles Seite 63 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Electro-hydraulic steering*
The level of steering assistance depends on the vehicle speed and on the
steering angle.
The warning lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on. It should go out when the engine has started running.
There is a fault in the electro-hydraulic steering system if the lamp does not
go out or lights up whilst the vehicle is in motion. Take the vehicle to the
Authorised Service Centre as soon as possible.
Engine management
This warning lamp monitors the engine management system
for petrol engines.
The warning lamp (Electronic Power Control) lights up when the ignition
is switched on to show that the lamp is working properly. It should go out
when the engine has started running.
If a fault develops in the electronic engine management system while you are
driving, this warning lamp will light up. Take the vehicle to an Authorised
Service Centre as soon as possible and have the engine checked.
Glow plug system / En
The warning lamp light
preheating. It flashes if
Warning lamp is lit
The warning lamp lights u
warning lamp goes off, the e
Warning lamp flashes
If a fault develops in the eng
the glow plug lamp will flash
Centre as soon as possible a
Turn signals
The warning lamp flash
ation.
Depending on which turn sign
cator lamp flashes. Both warn
hazard warning lights are sw
If one turn signal fails, the wa
Further information on the tu
Cockpit64
ou can see or hear steam or coolant escaping t. Risk of scalding. Wait until you can no team or coolant.
of any motor vehicle is a dangerous area! in the engine compartment, switch off the wn. Always note the corresponding warnings
s up when the main beams are on.
p when the main beams are on or when the
1.
indicate that the fuel tank is down to
f fuel remain in the tank. Also, an audible as a reminder to fill up with fuel at the earliest
cordoba_ingles Seite 64 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Coolant Level* / temperature
The warning lamp lights up if the coolant temperature is too
high or if the coolant level is too low.
There is a fault if:
The warning symbol does not go out again after a few seconds.
The warning lamp lights up or flashes while the vehicle is moving, while
three acoustic warning signals are emitted.
This means that either the coolant level is too low or the coolant temperature
is too high.
Coolant temperature too high
First look at the coolant temperature gauge. The coolant temperature is too
high if the needle is over the warning area on the dial. Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and wait for it to cool down. Check the coolant level.
If the coolant level is correct, the overheating may be caused by a malfunction
of the radiator fan. Check the radiator fan fuse and have it replaced if neces-
sary page 197.
If the warning lamp lights up again after driving on for a short distance, stop the vehicle and switch off the engine. Contact an Authorised Service Centre
or a qualified workshop.
Coolant level too low
First look at the coolant temperature gauge. If the needle is in the normal
range, top up with coolant at the earliest opportunity .
WARNING
If your vehicle is immobilised for any technical reasons, move it to a safe distance from traffic. Turn off the engine, turn on the hazard lights and place the warning triangle.
Never open the bonnet if y from the engine compartmen longer see or hear escaping s
The engine compartment Before carrying out any work engine and allow it to cool do page 169.
Main beam headlights
This warning lamp light
The warning lamp lights u
headlight flasher is operated.
Further information page 9
Fuel level / reserve
This symbol lights up to
the reserve level.
This lights when only 7 litres o
warning is given. This serves
opportunity page 166.
WARNING (continued)
Cockpit 65
Safety Fir Technical Data
you brake. This could cause the rear to break e carefully to the nearest qualified workshop .
rake
s up if the handbrake is applied, if the
o low or if there is a fault in the brake
up if
oo low page 182
ake system
p together with the anti-lock brake system
p does not go out, or if it lights up when l page 182, Brake fluid in the reservoir is
p the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain tech-
p lights up together with the ABS warning n of the ABS could be out of action. This could k quickly when you brake. This could cause the
idding. Drive carefully to the nearest qualified t corrected.
cordoba_ingles Seite 65 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
A warning lamp system monitors the ABS.
The warning lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on. It goes out again after the system has run through an automatic
test sequence.
There is a fault in the ABS if:
The warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on.
The warning lamp does not go out again after a few seconds.
The warning lamp lights up when the vehicle is moving.
The vehicle can still be braked in the normal way (except that the ABS control
function will not function). Please take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as
soon as possible. For further information on the ABS see the page 139.
If a fault occurs in the ABS, the ESP* warning lamp will also light up.
Brake system fault
If the ABS warning lamp lights up together with the brake warning lamp
, this indicates not only a fault in the ABS function, but also a possible fault
in the brake system .
WARNING
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings on page 169, Working in the engine compartment.
If the brake warning lamp should light up together with the ABS warning lamp , stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid level in the reservoir page 182, Brake fluid. If the fluid level has dropped below the MIN mark you must not drive on. Risk of accident. Obtain technical assistance.
If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in the brake system may have been caused by a failure of the ABS system. This could cause the rear
wheels to lock quickly when away. Risk of skidding. Driv and have the fault corrected
Brake system* / handb
The warning lamp light
brake fluid level falls to
system.
This warning lamp lights
If the handbrake is on
If the brake fluid level is t
If there is a fault in the br
This warning lamp can light u
warning lamp.
WARNING
If the brake warning lam driving, the brake fluid leve too low. Risk of accident. Sto nical assistance.
If the brake warning lam lamp , the control functio cause the rear wheels to loc rear to break away. Risk of sk workshop and have the faul
WARNING (continued)
Cockpit66
programme (ESP)*
itors the electronic stabilisation
S, EDL and TCS.
following functions:
onds when the ignition is switched on while a
ut.
activated when driving.
y if there is a malfunction in the ESP.
y if the ESP is switched off.
lt should occur in the ABS because the ESP
he ABS.
hts up and stays on after the engine is started,
l system has temporarily switched off the ESP.
ctivated by switching the ignition off and then
goes out, this means the system is fully
at deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-
rted into the ignition. The immobiliser will be
as soon as you pull the key out of the ignition
tarted if the appropriate coded SEAT genuine
cordoba_ingles Seite 66 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Emission control system*
This warning lamp monitors the exhaust system.
Warning lamp flashes:
When there is misfiring that can damage the catalytic converter. Reduce
speed and drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop to have the
engine checked.
Warning lamp is lit:
If a fault has developed during driving which has reduced the quality of the
exhaust gas (e. g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and drive carefully to
the nearest qualified workshop to have the engine checked.
Traction control system (TCS)*
The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from
spinning when the vehicle is accelerating
The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on and should turn
out after about 2 seconds.
When the TCS is operating while driving, the warning lamp flashes. If the
system is deactivated or if there is any fault in the same, the warning lamp will
remain lit.
It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the TCS oper-
ates in conjunction with the ABS. For further information see page 139,
Brakes
Electronic stabilisation
This warning lamp mon
program.
This program includes the AB
The warning lamp has the
It will light for about 2 sec
test of the function is carried o
It flashes when the ESP is
It will light up continuousl
It will light up continuousl
It will also come on if a fau
operates in conjunction with t
If the ESP warning lamp lig
this may mean that the contro
In this case the ESP can be rea
on again. If the warning lamp
functional.
Electronic immobiliser*
Inside the key there is a chip th
matically when the key is inse
activated again automatically
lock.
The engine can, however, be s
key is used.
Cockpit 67
Safety Fir Technical Data
EDL)*
the ABS in vehicles equipped with an
Program (ESP)*
dicated by the ABS warning lamp . Please
workshop as soon as possible. For further infor-
42, Electronic differential lock (EDL)*
cordoba_ingles Seite 67 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Note The vehicle cannot be operated properly if you do not have a genuine SEAT
key.
Engine oil pressure
This warning lamp indicates that the engine oil pressure is
too low.
If this warning symbol starts to flash, and is accompanied by three audible warnings, switch off the engine and check the oil level. If the oil level is too
low, add more engine oil page 172.
If the symbol flashes although the oil level is correct, do not drive on. The
engine must not even run at idle speed. Obtain technical assistance.
Trailer turn signals
This warning lamp also flashes when the turn signals are
operated while towing a caravan or trailer.
The warning lamp flashes when the turn signals are operated, provided a
trailer is correctly attached and connected to the vehicle.
The warning lamp will not flash if one of the turn signals on the trailer fails.
Differential lock fault (
EDL operates along with
Electronic Stabilisation
A malfunction in the EDL is in
take the vehicle to a qualified
mation on the EDL page 1
Steering wheel controls*68
Fig. 42 Controls on the steering wheel
Long press
udio CD mp3 CDC
ontinue volume up
ntinue volume down
Fast forward
cordoba_ingles Seite 68 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Steering wheel controls*
Audio control via the controls on the steering wheel
Fig. 41 Controls on the steering wheel
Button
Short press
Radio CD Audio CD mp3 CDC Radio CD A
Volume up C
Volume down Co
Search upwards
for station Following track
Search upwards
for station
AA
AB
AC
Steering wheel controls* 69
Safety Fir Technical Data
Rewind
o specified function
o specified function
o specified function
o specified function
cordoba_ingles Seite 69 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Search down-
wards for station Previous track
Search down-
wards for station
Change source cycle N
Silence N
Next preset No function Change folder Change CD
N
Previous preset No function Previous folder Previous CD
N
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
Opening and closing70
ce consisting of a double lock for the
ation function for the boot in order to
difficult.
when the vehicle is locked using the key or the
e key, rotate the key once in the door lock
n.
he remote control, press the lock button on the
, it is not possible to open the doors normally,
. The boot/tailgate may not be opened. The
t work.
ctivated voluntarily by the user.
es in quick succession (in under 2 seconds).
ecuted using the key or the remote control.
cylinder twice in the locking direction.
he remote control, press the lock button on the
activated, the alarm volumetric sensor is also
cordoba_ingles Seite 70 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Opening and closing
Central locking
Description
The central locking system enables you to lock and unlock all
the doors and the tailgate from one point.
Central locking can be activated using any of the following options:
the key, by inserting it into the driver's door cylinder and rotating manu-
ally,
the central locking button, (electronic control) in the passenger compart-
ment page 72.
the radio frequency remote control, using the buttons on the key
page 77.
Various functions are available to improve the vehicle security:
- Locking systemSafe
- Selective unlocking system*
- Locking system for involuntary unlocking
- Automatic speed dependent locking and unlocking system*
- Emergency unlocking system
Note For anti-theft security, only the driver's door is fitted with a lock cylinder.
Safety system Safe
This is an anti-theft devi
door locks and a deactiv
make forced entry more
Activation
The safe system is activated
remote control.
To activate this system with th
cylinder in the locking directio
To activate the system using t
remote once.
When this system is activated
from the outside or the inside
central locking button does no
Voluntary deactivation
The Safe system can be dea
This is done by locking two tim
This double locking can be ex
Using the key, rotate the lock
To activate the system using t
remote twice.
When the Safe system is de
deactivated.
Opening and closing 71
Safety Fir Technical Data
stem*
nlocking only the driver's door, or all
cking (once). This can be done with the key or
nce in the lock cylinder in the unlock direction.
sed from the Safe system and unlocked and
ator light will switch off. For vehicles fitted with
tivated.
ss the unlock button on the remote once. The
for all the vehicle, only the driver's door is
rm is turned off as is the light indicator.
oot
boot can be opened, the unlock button on
twice.
wice in under 2 seconds and this will deactivate
vehicle, all doors will be unlocked and the boot
r will be turned off as will be the alarm for those
82.
cordoba_ingles Seite 71 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
When the Safe system is deactivated, the doors are locked using the simple
locking system, meaning that they may be opened from the interior but not
from the exterior.
Involuntary deactivation
The methods described for deactivation of the Safe system may be
executed involuntarily (for example, if we press the button because we
want to lock the vehicle, and it locks as a result, however, we are not sure that
it is locked and we press the button once more within 2 seconds, we will have
deactivated the Safe system).
Deactivation when opening
To deactivate the system on opening, see Selective unlocking system*
Safe status
On the driver's door, there is a light indicator visible from the outside of the
vehicle that indicates the Safe system status.
We can see that the Safe system is activated, by the flashing of the light
indicator . The indicator will flash on all vehicles, whether they are fitted with
an alarm or not, and until the vehicle is unlocked.
Remember:
Safe activated with or without alarm: Continuous flashing of the indicator.
Safe deactivated without alarm: The indicator remains unlit.
Safe deactivated with alarm: The indicator remains unlit.
WARNING
No one should remain in the vehicle if the Safe deadlock mechanism has been activated. It is not possible to open the doors from the inside or the outside and this would make any outside intervention difficult in case of emergency. Danger of death. People could become trapped inside in an emergency.
Selective unlocking sy
This system allows for u
the vehicle.
Driver's door unlock button
This is done by a simple unlo
the remote control.
With the key, rotate the key o
The driver's door will be relea
may be opened and the indic
an alarm, this system is deac
Using the remote control, pre
Safe system is deactivated
unlocked for opening, the ala
Unlocking all doors and the b
So that all the doors and the
the remote must be pressed
The button must be pressed t
the Safe system for all the
will be activated. The indicato
vehicles fitted with one.
Unlocking the boot
See page 77 and page
Opening and closing72
n, the internal door release levers should not a door to open.
ystem
if the airbags are triggered during an accident,
ble to lock the vehicle from inside using the
he ignition off and back on again.
d and unlocked from the inside using
n.
Fig. 43 Central locking button
cordoba_ingles Seite 72 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Locking system for involuntary unlocking
This is an anti-theft system and will avoid situations where
the vehicle is left open unintentionally
The vehicle will be re-locked automatically, if it is unlocked and neither the
boot or any of the doors are opened within 30 seconds. This function
prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is
pressed by mistake.
Automatic speed dependent locking and unlocking system*
This is a safety system to prevent access to the vehicle from
the exterior when the vehicle is in transit (for example, when
stopped at a traffic light).
Locking
The doors and the boot are automatically locked when vehicle speed exceeds
15 km/h.
If the vehicle is stopped and one of the doors is opened, when the vehicle
moves off again and exceeds a speed of 15 km/h the unlocked door(s) will be
locked once more.
Unlocking
The driver's door automatically unlocks when the key is removed from the
ignition.
Each door may be unlocked and opened from the interior (for example when
a passenger gets out). For this, simply operate the lever on the inside of the
door twice.
WARNING
When the vehicle is in motio be operated, this could cause
Emergency unlocking s
The entire vehicle is unlocked
except for the boot. It is possi
central locking, after turning t
Central locking button
The vehicle can be locke
the central locking butto
Opening and closing 73
Safety Fir Technical Data
activated after unlocking the door lock cylinder
cordoba_ingles Seite 73 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Locking the vehicle
Press the button .
Unlocking the doors
Press the button .
The central locking button is still operative when the ignition is switched off.
Except, if the "safe" security system is activated.
Please note the following when you use the central locking button to lock your
vehicle:
It will not be possible to open the doors or the tailgate from the outside
(this may offer extra safety, for instance when stopped at traffic lights).
The driver's door cannot be locked if it is open. This prevents you from
locking yourself out of the vehicle.
Repeated operation of the central locking will deactivate the central
locking button for 30 seconds. Once this time has passed, the button may be
used once more.
There is a danger that the key may remain inside the vehicle, if the vehicle
is locked using the central locking button when the driver's door is closed
and, for example, the passenger door open. If this door is closed, then the
keys will remain inside the vehicle.
All doors may be locked separately from inside the car. Do this by pulling
the door release lever twice.
WARNING
If the vehicle is locked, children and disabled people may be trapped inside.
The central locking button is not operative in the following cases.
When the vehicle is locked from the outside (using the remote or the key).
While the ignition is not with the key.
Note Vehicle locked, button
Vehicle unlocked, button
WARNING (continued)
Opening and closing74
nt of the electronic opening and locking
nly affects the rear doors. It is only
deactivate it manually, as described
ock
n the door you wish to child-proof.
ate the groove in the door using the igni-
for the left hand side doors, and clock-
side doors fig. 44, fig. 45.
f lock
n the door for which you wish to deacti-
.
ate the groove in the door using the igni-
for the right-hand side doors, and clock-
ide doors fig. 44, fig. 45.
tivated, the door can be opened from the
ck can be activated and deactivated using the
or is open, as described above.
cordoba_ingles Seite 74 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Childproof locks
The childproof lock prevents the rear doors being opened
from the inside. This system prevents minors from opening a
door accidentally while the vehicle is moving.
This function is independe
systems of the vehicle. It o
possible to activate it and
below:
Activating the childproof l
Unlock the car and ope
With the door open, rot
tion key, anti-clockwise
wise for the right hand
Deactivating the childproo
Unlock the car and ope
vate the childproof lock
With the door open, rot
tion key, anti-clockwise
wise for the left-hand s
When the childproof lock is ac
outside only. The childproof lo
key in the groove when the do
Fig. 44 Child safety lock on the left hand side door
Fig. 45 Child safety lock on the right hand side door
Opening and closing 75
Safety Fir Technical Data
r vehicle consists of the following items:
fig. 46 with folding key bit*,
ontrol ,
ey number.
without the key number on the key tab fig. 46
n a safe place.
the vehicle.
give the plastic key tab to the new owner.
n. This unfolds thanks to a spring
Fig. 47 Folding key
AA
AB
cordoba_ingles Seite 75 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Keys
Key set
The set of keys includes a remote control, a key without a
remote control and a key tab with the number of the key.
The key set belonging to you
one remote control key
one key without remote c
one key tab with the k
Plastic key tab
Spare keys cannot be issued
. Therefore:
Always keep the key tab i
Never leave the key tab in
If you sell the vehicle, please
Folding key*
To unfoldkey bit, press butto
device fig. 47.
Fig. 46 Set of keys AC
AB
Opening and closing76
cordoba_ingles Seite 76 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
To fold the key bit, press the button and push with the hand, until it is
correctly folded page 75, fig. 47.
Duplicate keys
If you need a replacement key, take your key tab to an Authorised Service
Centre.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the keys can result in critical injuries.
Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle; in case of emer- gency they may not be able to leave the vehicle or look after themselves.
Unsupervised use of a key could mean that the engine is started or that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric windows). Risk of accident. The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could result in people being trapped in the vehicle in an emergency.
Never leave any of the vehicle keys in the vehicle. Unauthorised use of your vehicle could result in injury, damage or theft. Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.
Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident. The steering lock could engage suddenly, and you would not be able to steer the vehicle.
Caution There are electronic components in the key and remote control. Protect the
keys from moisture and excessive vibration.
Opening and closing 77
Safety Fir Technical Data
e performed using the remote control and
tral locking system.
m* and the locking security system (double
ontrol device with batteries is fitted in the head
er is in the interior of the vehicle.
always flashes when the remote control is used.
49 of the remote control is shown in the
e depends on a number of circumstances.
ng down the range is also reduced.
icle
the range, pointing towards the vehicle and
fig. 48 . The indicators flash twice. To
Fig. 49 Range of the remote control
A1
cordoba_ingles Seite 77 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Radio frequency remote control
Locking and unlocking the vehicle
The remote control key can be used to lock and unlock the
vehicle from a distance.
The following functions can b
without using the key itself
Opening and closing cen
Turning the anti theft alar
lock) on and off.
Turning interior light on.
The radiofrequency remote c
of the vehicle key. The receiv
The indicator light for the key
The range (red zones) fig.
diagram. The maximum rang
When the batteries are runni
Opening and closing the veh
Toopen, place the key within
briefly press the open button
Fig. 48 Assignment of buttons on the remote control key
Opening and closing78
sing the button, the vehicle will be
ny of the doors or the tailgate are not opened
g the vehicle. This function prevents the vehicle
e unlocking button is pressed by mistake.
ened and closed using the remote control, the
be re-synchronised page 78.
ot flash when the buttons are pushed, the
may damage the radio frequency remote
s replace the dead battery with another of the
vironment osed of in accordance with regulations
e environment.
te control key
control key
been delivered with the vehicle; the key
e normal key page 77,
49.
A1
cordoba_ingles Seite 78 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
close the vehicle, press the close button briefly fig. 48 . The indica-
tors flash once.
By pressing the locking button twice page 77, fig. 48 both the
locking security mechanism (double) and the volumetric alarm* are deacti-
vated but the perimetric alarm* remains active and this is indicated by the
indicator light on the drivers door.
Selective unlocking*
When the button page 77, fig. 48 is used the driver's door is
unlocked, all others remain locked.
Press the button page 77, fig. 48 twice to unlock all doors.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the key can result in critical injuries.
Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle; in case of emer- gency they may not be able to leave the vehicle or look after themselves.
Never leave any of the vehicle keys in the vehicle. This could result in serious injuries, accidents or the theft of your vehicle. Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.
Unsupervised use of a key could mean that the engine is started or that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric windows). Risk of accident. The vehicle can be locked using the remote control key. This could result in people being trapped in the vehicle in an emergency.
Note The radio-frequency remote control can also be programmed so that only
the driver's door is unlocked the first time that the unlocking button on the
radio frequency remote control key is pressed. When the button is pressed
once more, all doors and the tailgate will be unlocked.
The remote control functions only when you are in range page 77,
fig. 49 (red area).
If the vehicle is unlocked u
locked again automatically if a
within 30 seconds of unlockin
from remaining unlocked if th
If the vehicle cannot be op
remote control key will have to
Changing the battery
If the battery indicator does n
battery must be replaced.
Caution Use of inappropriate batteries
control. For this reason, alway
same size and power.
For the sake of the en The flat batteries must be disp
governing the protection of th
Synchronising the remo
Synchronising the remote
Use both keys that have
with the remote and th
fig. 48 page 77, fig.
A2
A2
A1
A1
Opening and closing 79
Safety Fir Technical Data
ystem*
ft alarm system*
gers an alarm if unauthorised move-
und the vehicle.
more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal
are triggered if the car is opened using the
rised access is gained to the vehicle.
automatically switched on when the vehicle is
r turn the key once in the lock towards the
ton on the radio-frequency remote
ted immediately and the indicator light located
along with the indicators indicating that the
y system (double lock) have been turned on.
e indicator lamps light up only if the alarm has
he protection zones should be correctly closed).
et are open, when the alarm is connected these
otection zones of the vehicle. If the door or
d, they will automatically be included in the
the indicators will flash accordingly.
r an alarm?
, in the locked vehicle, when:
on
A2
cordoba_ingles Seite 79 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Maximum time allowed for synchronising is 30 seconds.
The normal key is used to activate the ignition, and the key with
the remote control is the key to be programmed.
Check that the car is open before commencing programming.
Place the key without remote control in the contact inside the
steering and ignition lock.
Use the key with remote control and mechanically lock the
vehicle from the driver's door.
Open and close the driver's door lock mechanically, using the
remote control key.
At the same time press the button on the remote control
key.
Complete the procedure by removing the key from the contact
It is possible that the vehicle could no longer be opened and closed with the
remote control if the button is repeatedly pressed outside of the effective
range of the radio frequency remote control. The remote control key will have
to be resynchronised.
Spare remote control keys are available from Authorised Service Centres, they
must be matched to the locking system.
Anti-theft alarm s
Description of anti-the
The anti-theft alarm trig
ments are detected aro
The anti-theft alarm makes it
it. Audible and visible alarms
mechanical key, or if unautho
The anti-theft alarm system is
locked. To lock the door eithe
locking position or press but
control*. The system is activa
on the drivers door will flash
alarm and the locking securit
When the vehicle is locked th
been correctly activated (all t
If any of the doors or the bonn
will not be included in the pr
bonnet is subsequently close
vehicle protection zones and
When does the system trigge
The alarm system is triggered
a door
the bonnet or
the tailgate
are unduly opened
or the ignition is switched
A1
Opening and closing80
ion included in the antitheft alarm
using ultrasound, unauthorised
the vehicle.
2 transmitters and one receiver.
hed on when the antitheft alarm is acti-
cle is closed mechanically, or by pressing
mote control.
he key, either mechanically3) or by
on the remote control.
on the remote control. Only the volu-
ated. The alarm system remains acti-
will be switched on automatically with the
rs and the tailgate must be closed to activate
itoring system.
switched off, if for example animals are briefly
r movements could otherwise trigger an alarm.
so be deactivated if the windows are left
larm may be triggered due to the effect caused
door is opened until the key is inserted in the contact
erwise the alarm will be triggered.
cordoba_ingles Seite 80 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
The horn is sounded and the turn signals flash for approx. 30 seconds.
How is the alarm switched off?
To deactivate the anti theft alarm, the key must be turned to the open position
in the drivers door and the ignition must be turned on within 15 seconds, or
the button on the remote control may also be used.
The indicator light flashes twice on opening and the alarm is deactivated.
The indicator light flashes once on closing and the alarm is activated.
In vehicles equipped with an additional* alarm system, if the vehicle is
opened using the driver's door key, you have 15 sec to insert the key in the
ignition lock and activate the ignition. Otherwise, the alarm will go off for 30
sec. and the ignition will be blocked.
In vehicles with keys without remote control it is necessary to wait 30 seconds
until the alarm stops. Then lock the vehicle using the key and repeat the
above process.
If the vehicle is opened at any door other than the driver's door or the tailgate
the alarm will go off for 30 seconds.
Note After 28 days the indicator light will switch off to prevent the battery
running down where the vehile has been left parked for a long period of time.
The alarm system remains activated.
If, after the alarm has stopped, attempts are made to open another
protection zone, the alarm will be triggered again.
The alarm system can be activated or deactivated using the remote
control page 77.
Volumetric sensor *
Monitor or control funct
system*, which detects,
access to the interior of
The system has 3 sensors,
Activation
It is automatically switc
vated, whether the vehi
the button on the re
Deactivation
Open the vehicle with t
pressing the button
Press the button twice
metric sensor is deactiv
vated.
The interior monitoring system
anti-theft alarm. All of the doo
the sensor of the interior mon
The interior monitor should be
left in the locked vehicle. Thei
The interior monitor should al
slightly open, otherwise the a
by wind entering the vehicle.
3) The time period from when the
should not exceed 15 sec., oth
Opening and closing 81
Safety Fir Technical Data
cordoba_ingles Seite 81 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Note If, after deactivating the volumetric sensor, the vehicle is locked using the
remote control or the key in the door lock in under 30 seconds, the volumetric
sensor will remain deactivated. The other functions of the antitheft alarm*
will remain activated. After this time, the deactivation function of the volu-
metric sensor is cancelled.
If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm is activated without the volumetric
sensor function, relocking will activate the alarm with all its functions, except
the volumetric sensor. This function is reactivated when the alarm is next
switched on, unless it is deliberately switched off.
If the alarm has been triggered due to the volumetric sensor, when the
vehicle is opened the indicator light on the driver's door will flash. The flash
is different to the flash indicating the alarm is activated.
If the alarm is triggered three times by the volumetic sensor, the alarm
system is no longer triggered.
Triggering caused by other sensors (doors, boot opening, etc.) will
continue
Opening and closing82
r and lift the tailgate fig. 50. The
in a vertical position fig. 51 .
handle on the interior lining and close it,
t.
1 is in a vertical position, the tailgate will open
the central locking system. Also, the tailgate
ing a key.
ontal position fig. 51, if the tailgate is
an only be opened using the main key.
ust be turned all the way fig. 51, in the
position the key may not be removed from the
Fig. 51 Closing the tail- gate
Aa
Ab
Ac
cordoba_ingles Seite 82 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Tailgate
Opening and locking
The operation of the tailgate opening system is electric. It is
activated by using the handle on the tailgate
Opening the tailgate
Pull on the release leve
keyhole should now be
Closing the tailgate
Grip the tailgate by the
using a light movemen
When the keyhole fig. 5
and lock automatically using
may be opened and locked us
When the keyhole is in a horiz
closed it remains locked and c
To open the tailgate the key m
direction of the arrow. In this
lock.
Fig. 50 Tailgate: Opening from the outside
Aa
Opening and closing 83
Safety Fir Technical Data
windows electrically
ic windows can be operated using the
door.
windows
open a window.
e a window .
lly if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended
ows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off
er door nor the front passenger door has been
een removed from the ignition.
Fig. 52 Section of the driver door: controls for the front and rear windows
cordoba_ingles Seite 83 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
If the keyhole is in horizontal position, this implies that the tailgate is locked
and can only be opened using the main key.
WARNING
Always close the tailgate properly. Risk of accident or injury.
Do not close the tailgate by pushing it down with your hand on the window. The glass could shatter. Risk of injury!
Ensure the tailgate is locked after closing. If not, it may open unexpect- edly while driving.
Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjected to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on the time of year. This could cause serious injuries/illness. It could even have fatal consequences. Close and lock both the tailgate and all the other doors when you are not using the vehicle.
Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no one is in the path of the tailgate.
Never drive with the tailgate open or half-closed, exhaust gasses may penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!
If only the boot is opened then do not leave the key inside. The vehicle may not be opened if the key is left inside.
Windows
Opening or closing the
The front and rear electr
controls in the driver's
Opening and closing the
Press the button to
Pull button to clos
Always close the windows fu
.
You can use the electric wind
the ignition if neither the driv
opened and the key has not b
Opening and closing84
ty switch to disable the rear electric windows. en disabled.
se because it is stiff or because of an obstruc-
ically open again page 85. If this happens,
ot be closed before attempting to close it
closing*
and closing function is only possible
an only be activated from the driver's
e window briefly to the second position.
.
or the window briefly to the second posi-
fully.
ing and closing
cordoba_ingles Seite 84 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Buttons in the driver door
Button for window in front left door
Button for window in front right door
Buttons for rear windows*
Safety switch for deactivating the electric window buttons in the rear
doors
Button for window in rear left door
Button for window in rear right door
Safety switch *
Safety switch in the driver door can be used to disable the electric window
buttons in the rear doors.
Safety switch not pushed in: the buttons in the rear doors are enabled.
Safety switch pushed in: the buttons in the rear doors are disabled.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury.
Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no one is in the path of a window.
Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if they have access to the keys. Unsupervised use of a key could mean that the engine is started or that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric windows). Risk of accident. The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could result in people being trapped in the vehicle in an emergency.
The electric windows will work until the key has been removed from the ignition and one of the front doors has been opened.
If necessary, use the safe Make sure that they have be
Note If the window is not able to clo
tion, the window will automat
check why the window could n
again.
One-touch opening and
The one-touch opening
on the front doors and c
door.
One-touch closing
Pull up the button for th
The window closes fully
One-touch opening
Push down the button f
tion. The window opens
Restoring one-touch open
Close all windows.
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A3
WARNING (continued)
Opening and closing 85
Safety Fir Technical Data
oll-back function will not work if there is a
ndows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.
tric windows can result in injury.
you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only time. Please ensure that children are never left .
l work until the key has been removed from the doors has been opened.
ithout observing and ensuring it is clear, to do us injury to you and others. Make sure that no w.
main in the vehicle when you close the vehicle ws cannot be opened even in an emergency.
tivated if the windows are closed from the
he ignition key for convenience closing
nd closing*
or lock of the driver door in either the
g position until all windows are either
rrupt this function.
cordoba_ingles Seite 85 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Use the key to lock the vehicle from outside and hold the key in
the lock position for at least one second. The one-touch function
is now ready for operation.
The buttons page 83, fig. 52 and have two levels for opening the
window and two for closing it. This makes it easier to open or close windows
to the desired position.
One-touch closing does not work when the ignition has been switched off,
even if the key is in the ignition.
The automatic open and close function will not work if the battery has been
temporarily disconnected, or if the battery is flat. The function then has to be
reactivated.
The one-touch function and roll-back function will not work if there is a
malfunction in the electric windows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.
Roll-back function
The windows have a roll-back function. This reduces the risk
of injuries when the windows are closing.
If a window is obstructed when closing automatically, the window stops
at this point and lowers immediately .
If this happens, check immediately (within 10 seconds) why the window
could not be closed before attempting to close it again. After 10 seconds the
normal automatic function resumes.
If the window is still obstructed, the window stops at this point.
If there is no obvious reason why the window cannot be closed, try to
close it again within five seconds.
If you wait longer than 10 / 5 seconds, the window will open fully when you
operate one of the buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.
The one-touch function and r
malfunction in the electric wi
WARNING
Incorrect use of the elec
Always take the key with intend to be gone for a short unsupervised in the vehicle
The electric windows wil ignition and one of the front
Never close the tailgate w otherwise could cause serio one is in the path of a windo
Never allow people to re from the outside. The windo
Note The roll-back function is deac
outside of the vehicle using t
page 85.
Convenience opening a
Using the door lock
Hold the key in the do
locking or the unlockin
opened or closed.
Release the key to inte
A1 A2
Opening and closing86
unroof
o position .
g roof fully if you park the vehicle or leave it
be operated for up to about ten minutes after
d off, provided the driver door and the front
d.
gether with the sliding/tilting roof. If required,
the sunroof is closed.
g/tilting sunroof can result in injury.
lting sunroof without observing and ensuring uld cause serious injury to you and others. he path of the sliding/tilting sunroof.
ey with you when you leave the vehicle.
sabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if . Unsupervised use of a key could mean that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric of accident! The doors can be locked using the d result in people being trapped in the vehicle
f continues to function until one of the front removed from the ignition.
AD
cordoba_ingles Seite 86 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Sliding/tilting roof*
Opening and closing the sliding/tilting roof
The sliding/tilting sunroof is opened and closed using the
rotary button when the ignition is switched on.
Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof
Turn the rotary button to position fig. 53 .
Opening/tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof
Turn the rotary button to position . The sunroof opens to the
convenience position where wind noise is reduced.
To open the roof further, turn the switch to position and hold
the switch in this position until the roof opens to the desired
position.
Tilting the sliding/tilting s
Turn the rotary button t
Always close the sliding/tiltin
unattended .
The sliding/tilting sunroof can
the ignition has been switche
passenger door are not opene
Sunroof blind
The sunroof blind is opened to
it can be closed by hand when
WARNING
Incorrect use of the slidin
Never close the sliding/ti it is clear, to do otherwise co Make sure that no one is in t
Always take the vehicle k
Never leave children or di they have access to the keys the engine is started or that sliding/tilting sunroof). Risk remote control key. This coul in an emergency.
The sliding/tilting sunroo doors is opened and the key
Fig. 53 Detail of the sunroof: rotary button for sliding/tilting sunroof
AA
AB
AC
Opening and closing 87
Safety Fir Technical Data
roll-back function which prevents larger objects
f is closed. The roll-back function does not
ed against the roof opening. The sliding/tilting
in immediately if it is obstructed when closing.
been opened again by the roll-back function, it
g the rotary button at the front in position
/tilting roof has closed fully. Please note that the ut the roll-back function.
reakdown
the sunroof may be closed manually.
by inserting a screwdriver in the rear section.
e cover fastening, insert it in the opening as far
the spring) and close the sliding roof.
ition.
Fig. 55 Emergency closing handle
cordoba_ingles Seite 87 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Convenience closing*
Using the door lock
Hold the key in the door lock of the driver's door in the locking
position until the sliding/tilting sunroof is closed.
Release the key to interrupt this function.
Note The sliding/tilting sunroof rotary button remains in the last position selected
if the roof is closed using convenience closing from outside the vehicle and
will have to be re-positioned the next time you drive.
Roll-back function of the sliding/tilting roof* The sliding/tilting roof has a
getting trapped when the roo
prevent fingers getting pinch
sunroof stops and opens aga
If the sliding/tilting roof has
can be closed only by pressin
fig. 54 until the sliding
sunroof will now close witho
Operation in the event of a b
In the event of a breakdown,
Remove the plastic cover
Remove the lever from th
as possible (pushing against
Fit the lever back into pos
Fig. 54 Detail of the sunroof: rotary button for sliding/tilting sunroof
AA
Lights and visibility88
s*
sition or to the first stop. The
switch lights up.
lights (vehicles with front fog lights)
sition or to the second stop .
e switch itself lights up.
lights (vehicles with no front fog lights)
sition or to the end. An indicator
lf lights up.
lights on. Risk of accident. The side lights are te the road ahead and to ensure that other
u. Always use your dipped headlights if it is
ts will only work with the ignition on. The side
when the ignition is turned off.
the key has been taken out of the ignition lock,
er door is opened. This is a reminder to switch
cordoba_ingles Seite 88 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Lights and visibility
Lights
Switching lights on and off
Switching on the side lights
Turn the light switch fig. 56 to position .
Switching on dipped headlights
Turn the light switch to position .
Switching off the lights
Turn the light switch to position 0.
Switching on the fog light
Turn the switch from po
symbol on the light
Switching on the rear fog
Turn the switch from po
An indicator lamp on th
Switching on the rear fog
Turn the switch from po
lamp on the switch itse
WARNING
Never drive with just the side not bright enough to illumina road users are able to see yo dark or if visibility is poor.
Note The dipped beam headligh
lights come on automatically
If the lights are left on after
a buzzer sounds when the driv
off the lights.
Fig. 56 Detail of the dash panel: Switch for lights, fog lights and rear fog light
Lights and visibility 89
Safety Fir Technical Data
t range control, you can adjust the headlight
being carried in the vehicle. In this way it is
coming traffic more than necessary. At the same
possible lighting for the road ahead using the
djusted when the dipped beam is switched on.
umb wheel down from the basic setting 0.
works when the engine is running. When it is
on the switch.
device of the rear window switches off automat-
again, after 20 minutes the rear window heater
e ignition is switched off.
A2
A2
Fig. 58 Instrument panel: rear window heater switch
cordoba_ingles Seite 89 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
The rear fog light is so bright that it can dazzle drivers behind you. You
should use the rear fog light only when visibility is very poor.
If you are towing a trailer equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with
a factory-fitted towing bracket, the rear fog light on the car will automatically
be switched off.
The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory
requirements.
Instrument and switch lighting / Headlight range control
Instrument and switch lighting
When the headlights are switched on, the brightness of the instruments and
switch lighting can be regulated to suit your requirements by turning the
thumb wheel fig. 57 .
Those vehicles fitted with xenon gas discharge headlights are fitted with an
automatic headlight range system.
Headlight range control
Using the electrical headligh
range to the load level that is
possible to avoid dazzling on
time, the driver has the best
correct headlight settings.
The headlights can only be a
To lower the beam, turn the th
Rear window heating
The rear window heating only
switched on, a lamp lights up
After 20 minutes, the heating
ically. If the button is pushed
stays on continuously until th
Fig. 57 Detail of the dash panel: Regulation for instrument and switch illumination and head- light range control
A1
A1
A2
Lights and visibility90
afe distance from moving traffic.
tch on the hazard warning lights .
ngage 1st gear, and for an automatic
to P.
e to draw the attention of other road users
key with you when you leave the vehicle.
rd warning lights to warn other road users, for
of a traffic jam
due to a technical defect
hicle or your vehicle is being towed.
eously when the hazard warning lights are
wo turn signal indicator lamps and the
will flash at the same time. The hazard
the ignition is switched off.
creases if your vehicle breaks down. Always hts and a warning triangle to draw the atten- ur stationary vehicle.
cordoba_ingles Seite 90 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
For the sake of the environment The rear window heater should be disconnected as soon as the glass is
demisted. By saving electrical power you can also save fuel .
Note To avoid possible damage to the battery, an automatic temporary disconnec-
tion of this function is possible, coming back on when normal operating
conditions are reestablished.
Hazard warning lights
The hazard warning lights are used to draw the attention of
other road users to your vehicle in emergencies.
If your vehicle breaks down:
1. Park your vehicle at a s
2. Press the button to swi
3. Switch the engine off.
4. Apply the handbrake.
5. On a manual gearbox e
move the selector lever
6. Use the warning triangl
to your vehicle.
7. Always take the vehicle
You should switch on the haza
instance:
When reaching the tail end
There is an emergency
Your vehicle breaks down
You are towing another ve
All turn signals flash simultan
switched on. That is that the t
indicator lamp in the switch warning lights also work when
WARNING
The risk of an accident in using the hazard warning lig tion of other road users to yo
Fig. 59 Detail of the dash panel: Hazard warning light switch
Lights and visibility 91
Safety Fir Technical Data
beam headlight lever has the following
nals
way up fig. 60 to indicate right, and
indicate left.
r down to the point where you incur
lease the lever. The turn signal will flash
ponding warning lamp will also flash.
and off
position .
fig. 60 to switch on the main
ards you to switch the main beam head-
the steering wheel to operate the
ts
and remove the key from the lock.
own to turn on the right or left-hand
vely.
A1
A2
A4
A3
cordoba_ingles Seite 91 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Never park where the catalytic converter could come into contact with inflammable materials under the vehicle, for example dry grass or spilt petrol. This could start a fire!
Note The battery will run down if the hazard warning lights are left on for a long
time, even if the ignition is switched off.
The use of the hazard warning lights described here is subject to the rele-
vant statutory requirements.
Turn signal and main beam headlight lever
The turn signal and main beam lever also operates the
parking lights and the headlight flasher.
The turn signal and main
functions:
Switching on the turn sig
Move the lever all the
all the way down to
Signalling a lane change
Push the lever up o
resistance and then re
three times. The corres
Switching main beam on
Turn the light switch to
Press the lever forward
beams.
Pull the lever back tow
lights off again.
Headlight flasher
Pull the lever towards
flasher.
Switching on parking ligh
Switch off the ignition
Move the lever up or d
parking lights respecti
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 60 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever
A2
A1
Lights and visibility92
d to select the following positions:
ion The interior lights are automatically
is unlocked or the key removed from the igni-
0 seconds after the closure of the doors. The
when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition
.
O fig. 61.
Fig. 61 Detail of the roof: Front reading light
cordoba_ingles Seite 92 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
WARNING
The main beam can dazzle other drivers. Risk of accident! Never use the main beam headlights or the headlight flasher if they could dazzle other drivers.
Note The turn signals only work when the ignition is switched on. The corre-
sponding warning lamp or flashes in the combi-instrument. The
warning lamp flashes when the turn signals are operated, provided a
trailer is correctly attached and connected to the vehicle. If a turn signal bulb
is defective, the warning lamp flashes at double speed. If the trailer turn
signal bulbs are damaged, warning lamp does not light up. You should
have the bulb replaced.
The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam
headlights are already on. The warning lamp then lights up on the control
panel.
The headlight flasher comes on for as long as you pull the lever even if
no other lights are switched on. The warning lamp then lights up on the
control panel.
When the parking lights are switched on, the headlight and the rear light
on the corresponding side of the vehicle light up. The parking lights will only
work if the key is removed from the ignition. If the lights are switched on, a
buzzer gives an audible warning while the driver door is open.
If the turn signal lever is left on after the key has been taken out of the
ignition lock, an acoustic signal sounds when the driver door is opened. This
is a reminder to switch off the turn signal, unless of course you wish to leave
the parking light on.
Interior lights
Front interior light
The switch fig. 61 is use
Courtesy light position
Sliding switch in central posit
switched on when the vehicle
tion lock. and turn off about 2
interior lights are switched off
is switched on.
Interior light switched on
Move the knob to the position
Interior light switched off O
Move the knob to the position
AA
Lights and visibility 93
Safety Fir Technical Data
the front passenger side will only light up if the
e glove box is open.
nd the front passenger can be pulled out of their
vehicle and turned towards the doors fig. 63
un visors have covers* .
Fig. 63 Sun visor on the driver side
A2
cordoba_ingles Seite 93 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Note If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off
after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the cour-
tesy light position selected. This prevents the battery discharging.
Front reading light*
Switching on the reading light
Press the corresponding button fig. 62 to switch on the reading light.
Switching off the reading lights
Press the corresponding button to switch off the reading light.
Glove box light*
The light in the glove box on
lights are switched on and th
Visibility
Sun visors
The sun visors for the driver a
mountings in the centre of the
.
The make-up mirrors in the s
Fig. 62 Front reading light
AB
A1
Lights and visibility94
the left or right to set the length of the
left - longer wipe pause, control to the
ses. Four wiper interval stages can be set
sition .
sition .
position to give the windscreen a brief
system
e steering wheel - Position , the wind-
ted.
The wipers-washers will keep running for
onds.
gain after approximately five seconds once the
perated.
es obstruct visibility and reduce safety levels.
ould not use the wash / wipe system unless reen with the heating and ventilation system. wise freeze on the windscreen and obscure
A2
A3
A4
A5
cordoba_ingles Seite 94 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Windscreen washers
Front windscreen wipers
The windscreen wiper lever controls the windscreen wipers
and the automatic wash and wipe.
The windscreen wiper lever fig. 64 has the following positions:
Switching off the wipers
Move the lever to position .
Intermittent wipe
Move the lever up to position .
Move the control to
intervals. Control to the
right - shorter wipe pau
using switch .
Slow wipe
Move the lever up to po
Continuous wipe
Move the lever up to po
Brief wipe
Move the lever down to
wipe.
Wash and wipe automatic
Pull the lever towards th
screen washer is activa
Then release the lever.
approximately four sec
The windscreen will be wiped a
wipe/wash system has been o
WARNING
Worn and dirty wiper blad
In cold conditions, you sh you have warmed the windsc The washer fluid could other your view of the road.
Fig. 64 Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever
A0
A1
AA
AA
Lights and visibility 95
Safety Fir Technical Data
s the frequency of the windscreen
ing on the amount of rain.
sor
iper lever into position fig. 65
the left or right to set the sensitivity of the
the right - high sensitivity. Switch to the
nterval wipe function. You will have to switch on
switch off the ignition. This is done by switching
n off and back on.
Fig. 65 Windscreen wiper lever
A1
cordoba_ingles Seite 95 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Always note the corresponding warnings on page 180.
Caution In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the
glass before using the wipers for the first time. If you switch on the wipers
when the wiper blades are frozen to the windscreen, you could damage both
the wiper blades and the wiper motor.
Note The windscreen wipers will only work when the ignition is switched on.
The heat output of the heated jets* is controlled automatically when the
ignition is switched on, depending upon the outside temperature.
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor control
wiper intervals, depend
Switching on the rain sen
Move the windscreen w
Move the control to
rain sensor. Switch to
right - low sensitivity
The rain sensor is part of the i
the rain sensor back on if you
the wiper intermittent functio
WARNING (continued)
AA
Lights and visibility96
if you cannot see clearly through the
or interior mirror
e lever at the bottom edge of the mirror should
o the back to select the anti-dazzle function.
nterior mirror*
le function can be switched on and off
Fig. 66 Automatic anti- dazzle interior mirror.
cordoba_ingles Seite 96 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Note Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the sensor. This may
cause sensor disruption or faults.
Headlight washer system
The headlight washers clean the headlight lenses.
The headlight washers are activated automatically when the windscreen
washer is used and the windscreen wiper lever is pulled towards the steering
wheel for at least 1.5 seconds provided the dipped headlights or main
beams are switched on. Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the head-
lights at regular intervals, for instance when filling the fuel tank.
Note
To ensure that the headlight washers work properly in winter, keep the
nozzle holders in the bumper free of snow and remove any ice with a de-icer
spray.
To remove water, the windscreen wipers will be activated from time to
time, the headlight wipers will be activated every three cycles.
Mirrors
Interior mirror
It is dangerous to drive
rear window.
Manual anti-dazzle function f
In the basic mirror position, th
be at the front. Pull the lever t
Automatic anti-dazzle i
The automatic anti-dazz
as desired.
Lights and visibility 97
Safety Fir Technical Data
be adjusted using the rotary knob in
irrors
position L (left wing mirror).
position the mirror so that you have a
f the vehicle.
(right exterior mirror).
to position the mirror so that you have a
f the car .
rs*
sting fig. 67.
Fig. 67 Exterior mirror control
cordoba_ingles Seite 97 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Switching off anti-dazzle function
Press button page 96, fig. 66. Warning lamp goes out:
Switching on anti-dazzle function
Press button page 96, fig. 66. Warning lamp is lit.
Anti-dazzle function
The anti-dazzle function is activated every time the ignition is switched on.
The green indicator lamp lights up in the mirror housing.
When the anti-dazzle function is activated the interior rear-view mirror will
darken automatically according to the amount of light it receives (for example
from the headlights of a vehicle behind). The anti-dazzle function is cancelled
if reverse gear is engaged.
Note The automatic anti-dazzle function will only work properly if the sun
blind* for the rear window is retracted and there are no other objects
preventing light from reaching the interior mirror.
If you have to stick any type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so in
front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-dazzle function from
working well or even from working at all.
Exterior mirrors
The exterior mirrors can
the centre console.
Basic setting of exterior m
1. Turn knob fig. 67 to
2. Turn the rotary knob to
good view to the rear o
3. Turn knob to position R
4. Swivel the rotary knob
good view to the rear o
Heating the exterior mirro
Turn the knob to demi
AA AB
AA
Lights and visibility98
vironment ould be switched off when it is no longer
ise.
t ever fails to operate, the mirrors can be
essing the edge of the mirror glass.
plies to vehicles with electric wing mirrors: If
s a result of exterior force (e.g. knocked when
rs must be folded in electrically to the final
irror housing by hand, as this will interfere
on.
e adjusted separately or simultaneously, as
cordoba_ingles Seite 98 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Place the control in position L or R once the mirrors have
demisted to prevent unnecessary use of the battery.
Folding in exterior mirrors*
Turn the control page 97, fig. 67 to position to fold in the
exterior mirrors. You should always fold in the exterior mirrors if
you are driving through an automatic car wash. This will help
prevent damage.
Folding exterior mirrors back out to the extended position*
Turn the knob to position L or R to fold the exterior mirrors back
out .
Synchronised wing mirror adjustment*
1. Turn the control to the position L (left exterior mirror).
2. Turn the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a
good view to the rear of the vehicle. The right wing mirror will be
adjusted at the same time (synchronised).
WARNING
The rear view convex or aspheric mirror increase the field of vision however the objects in the mirror appear smaller and further away . If you use these mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles behind you when changing lane, you could make a mistake. Risk of accident.
If possible, use the interior mirror to estimate distances to vehicles behind you.
Make sure that you do not get your finger trapped between the mirror and the mirror base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of injury!
For the sake of the en The exterior mirror heating sh
needed. Fuel is wasted otherw
Note If the electrical adjustmen
adjusted by hand by lightly pr
The following guideline ap
the mirror housing is moved a
parking the vehicle), the mirro
position. Do not readjust the m
with the mirror adjuster functi
The rear view mirrors can b
described before.
Seats and stowage 99
Safety Fir Technical Data
the footwell when the vehicle is moving; never l, out of the window or on the seat. This also correct sitting position exposes you to an
e event of a braking manoeuvre or an accident. u could sustain severe injuries due to an incor-
ver and front passenger to maintain a distance eering wheel or dash panel. If you fail to ce, the airbag will not protect you. Risk of fatal the driver and the steering wheel or between
dash panel should always be as great as
t passenger seat only when the vehicle is eat could move unexpectedly while the vehicle se the risk of an accident and therefore injury. your seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting nts.
to installing a child seat on the front lling a child seat, observe the warning note in y.
cordoba_ingles Seite 99 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Seats and stowage
The importance of correct seat adjustment
Proper seat adjustment optimises the level of protection
offered by seat belts and airbags.
Your vehicle has five passenger places, two individual front seats and three
places on the rear seat. Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt.
The driver seat and front passenger seat can be adjusted in many ways to suit
the physical requirements of the vehicle occupants. The correct seat position
is very important for:
fast and easy operation of all controls on the instrument panel,
relaxed posture that does not cause drowsiness,
safe driving page 7,
and to ensure that the seat belts and airbag system provide maximum
protection page 17.
WARNING
If the driver and passengers assume improper sitting positions, they may sustain critical injuries.
Never transport more people than there are seats available in the vehicle.
Every occupant in the vehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appro- priate child restraint system page 43, Child safety.
The front seats and all head restraints must always be adjusted to body size and the seat belt must always be properly adjusted to provide you and your passengers with optimum protection.
Always keep your feet in rest them on the dash pane applies to passengers. An in increased risk of injury in th If the airbag is triggered, yo rect sitting position.
It is important for the dri of at least 25 cm from the st observe the minimum distan injury. The distance between the front passenger and the possible.
Adjust the driver or fron stationary. Otherwise your s is moving. This could increa In addition, while adjusting position. Risk of fatal accide
Special guidelines apply passenger seat. When insta the page 43, Child safet
WARNING (continued)
Seats and stowage100
nt so that its upper edge is at the same
head, or as close as possible to the same
head and, as a very minimum at eye
ig. 69.
page 101.
estraints removed or improperly adjusted njuries.
restraints could lead to death in the event of
restraints also increase the risk of injury driving or braking manoeuvres.
always be adjusted according to the occu-
Fig. 69 Viewed from side: Properly adjusted head restraints and proper belt adjustment
cordoba_ingles Seite 100 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Head restraints
Correct adjustment of head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
occupant protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations.
Adjust the head restrai
level as the top of your
level as the top of your
level fig. 68 and f
Adjusting the head restraints
WARNING
Travelling with the head r increases the risk of severe i
Improperly adjusted head a collision or accident.
Incorrectly adjusted head during sudden or unexpected
The head restraints must pant's size.
Fig. 68 Viewed from in front: Properly adjusted head restraints and proper belt adjustment
Seats and stowage 101
Safety Fir Technical Data
d restraint engages securely in one of its
tral seat)
e side and pull upwards to the desired
raint, press the button and push head
d restraint engages securely in one of its
eats)
t forward or back to the required position.
int
t up as far as it will go.
. 70 (arrow).
of fitting without releasing the button.
nt into the guides on the rear backrest.
wn.
int to suit body size page 12.
estraints have been removed. Risk of injury.
cordoba_ingles Seite 101 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Removing or adjusting head restraints
The head restraints can be adjusted by moving them up and
down.
Adjusting height (front seats)
Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired
position.
To lower the head restraint, press the button and push head
restraint downwards.
Make sure that it engages securely into position.
Adjust height (rear outer seats)
Press the button on the side and pull upwards or downwards to
the desired position.
Make sure that the hea
positions.
Adjusting height (rear cen
Press the button on th
position.
To lower the head rest
restraint downwards.
Make sure that the hea
positions page 12.
Angle adjustment (front s
Press the head restrain
Removing the head restra
Push the head restrain
Press the button fig
Pull head restraint out
Fitting the head restraint
Insert the head restrai
Push head restraint do
Adjust the head restra
WARNING
Never drive if the head r
Fig. 70 Adjusting and removing the head restraints
Seats and stowage102
seats
ards and backwards
ve the seat forwards or backwards.
and move the seat further until the
ht*
h down (several times if necessary) from
adjusts the seat height in stages.
angle
backrest and turn the hand wheel.
Fig. 71 Front left seat controls
cordoba_ingles Seite 102 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Never drive if the head restraints are in an unsuitable position, there is a risk of serious injury.
After refitting the head restraint, you must always adjust it properly for height to achieve optimal protection.
Please observe the safety warnings page 100, Correct adjustment of head restraints.
Note To fit and remove the rear head restraints, gently tilt the seat back
forwards.
When fitting the head restraints again, insert the tubes as far as possible
into the guides without pressing the button.
Front seats
Adjustment of the front
Adjusting the seat forw
Pull up the grip and mo
Then release the grip
catch engages.
Adjusting the seat heig
Pull the lever up or pus
its home position. This
Adjusting the backrest
Take your weight off the
WARNING (continued)
A1
A1
A2
A3
Seats and stowage 103
Safety Fir Technical Data
and backrests can be heated electri-
umb wheel fig. 72 to switch on the seat
ing is switched off in the 0 position.
hen the ignition is switched on. The left thumb
nd the right thumb wheel the right seat.
g elements, please do not kneel on the seat or
gle point to the seat cushion and backrest.
Fig. 72 Thumb wheel for the front seat heating
cordoba_ingles Seite 103 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
WARNING
Never adjust the driver or front passenger seat while the vehicle is in motion. While adjusting your seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting position. Risk of fatal accidents. Adjust the driver or front passenger seat only when the vehicle is stationary.
To reduce the risk of injury to the driver and front passenger during sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted far to the rear. The maximum protection of the seat belt can be achieved only when the backrests are in an upright position and the driver and front passenger have properly adjusted their seat belts. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to improper positioning of the belt web!
Exercise caution when adjusting the seat height or forwards/back- wards position. Injuries can be caused if the backrest is tilted without due care and attention.
Heated seats*
The front seat cushions
cally.
Turn the appropriate th
heating. The seat heat
The seat heating only works w
wheel controls the left seat a
Caution To avoid damaging the heatin
apply sharp pressure at a sin
Seats and stowage104
int page 101.
e seat cushion fig. 73 upwards in
w.
ards in the direction of the arrow.
fig. 74 in the direction of the arrow and
rds
ts in their fastenings page 101.
ints from their fastening on the seat
correctly engages in the catches.
ed correctly.
estraints page 12.
push it backwards below the seatbelt
he cushion downwards.
rest and cushion can be lowered and raised
A1
cordoba_ingles Seite 104 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Rear seat bench
Folding down rear seats
Folding seat down
Remove the head restra
Pull the front edge of th
the direction of the arro
Lift the cushion forw
Pull the release button fold the backrest forwa
Insert the head restrain
Raising the seat
Remove the head restra
cushion.
Lift the backrest until it
Check that it has engag
Replace the rear head r
Lower the cushion and
buckles.
Press the front part of t
On split rear seats 4) the back
respectively in two sections.
Fig. 73 Folding up the rear seat cushion
Fig. 74 Button for unlocking the rear back- rest
4) Optional equipment
A2
Seats and stowage 105
Safety Fir Technical Data
mpartment cover closed while the vehicle is in injury during a sudden braking manoeuvre or
river's side
artment on the driver's side
ll outwards fig. 76
Fig. 76 Driver's side compartment
cordoba_ingles Seite 105 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
WARNING
Please be careful when folding back the backrest! Injuries can be caused if the backrest is tilted without due care and attention.
Do no trap or damage seatbelts when raising the backrest.
After raising the backrest, check it has engaged properly in position .
The three point automatic seat belt only works correctly when the back- rest of the central seat is correctly engaged.
Stowage compartments
Stowage compartment on the front passenger side
The compartment can be opened by pulling the lever fig. 75.
WARNING
Always keep the stowage co motion to reduce the risk of in the event of an accident.
Object compartment, d
There is an object comp
To open the compartment, pu
Fig. 75 Passenger side: Stowage compartment
Seats and stowage106
p holder, this opens with a spring action.
til it is completely closed.
the drink holders. During normal or sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could be
(for example, glass or ceramic), these could accident.
s holder should always be closed to prevent reaking or accident.
Fig. 78 Front cup holder in the centre console
cordoba_ingles Seite 106 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Stowage drawer under front right seat*
To open
Press button and pull outwards, holding it with a hand.
To close
Press inwards until it engages.
Front cup holder*
To open
Press on the edge of cu
To close
Press the cup holder un
WARNING
Never place hot drinks in driving manoeuvres, sudden spilled. Danger of scalding.
Never use rigid materials cause injury in the case of an
When travelling the drink risk in the event of sudden b
Fig. 77 Stowage compartment under the front passenger seat
Seats and stowage 107
Safety Fir Technical Data
te lighter and electrical
the ashtray cover fig. 80 and it will
th a spring action.
e right-hand side and pull upwards.
er.
Fig. 80
AA
cordoba_ingles Seite 107 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Rear cup holder*
On the rear part of the centre console, behind the hand brake, there is a
drinks holder installed* fig. 79.
Ashtrays, cigaret sockets
Front ashtray
Opening
Press the lower part of
open automatically wi
Emptying the ashtray
Hold the ashtray on th
Replacement
Push ashtray into hold
Fig. 79 Cupholder in the centre console
Seats and stowage108
tte lighter can lead to serious injuries or start
cigarette lighter. Carelessness or negligence ter can cause burns, risk of injury.
works when the ignition is off and when the oid the risk of fire, never leave children unsu-
cket can also be used for other electrical
ng of up to 120 Watt. When the engine is
icle battery will discharge. For further informa-
y appliances connected to them are also func- hed off and the key removed. Improper use of ssories can lead to serious injuries or cause a y, never leave children unsupervised in the
s with the engine switched off will drain the
l accessories, see the instructions on
cordoba_ingles Seite 108 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Closing
Move the ashtray cover towards the gearstick until it engages.
WARNING
Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash could ignite the paper in the ashtray.
Cigarette lighter
Press on the cigarette lighter fig. 81 to activate it .
Wait for the lighter to pop out slightly.
Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the cigarette on the
glowing coil.
WARNING
Improper use of the cigare a fire.
Take care when using the when using the cigarette ligh
The cigarette lighter also ignition key is removed. To av pervised in the vehicle.
Electrical sockets
The 12 Volt cigarette lighter so
components with a power rati
switched off, however, the veh
tion page 162
WARNING
The electrical sockets and an tional with the ignition switc the sockets or electrical acce fire. To avoid the risk of injur vehicle.
Note Using electrical appliance
battery.
Before using any electrica
page 162.
Fig. 81 Cigarette lighter
Seats and stowage 109
Safety Fir Technical Data
ment
curely stowed.
ing points to ensure the vehicle handles
evenly as possible.
far forward in the luggage compartment
uggage compartment with suitable straps
.
r loose items in the vehicle can cause serious
age compartment can suddenly move and handles.
res or accidents, loose objects in the be flung forward, injuring vehicle occupants.
he luggage compartment and secure with suit- ly important for heavy objects.
vy objects, always keep in mind that a change lso cause changes in vehicle handling.
ion on safe driving page 7, Safe driving.
cordoba_ingles Seite 109 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
First-aid kit, warning triangle, fire extinguisher
First aid kit, warning triangles and fire extinguisher
The use of reflective warning triangles is obligatory in emergencies in some
countries. As are the first aid kit and a set of spare lightbulbs.
The first aid kit can be fitted in one of the stowage compartments, located
below the boot floor mat. The warning triangle can be attached to the back of
the boot using rubber straps. The fire extinguisher can be fixed on the left-
hand side of the boot floor, fastened with velcro.
Note The first aid kit, the warning triangles and the fire extinguisher are not
supplied with the vehicle as standard.
The first aid kit, the warning triangles and the fire extinguisher should
meet legal requirements.
The expiry date of the content of the first aid kit should be checked.
Ensure that the fire extinguisher is fully functional. The fire extinguisher
should, therefore, be checked regularly. The sticker on the fire extinguisher
will inform you of the next date for checking.
Before acquiring accessories and emergency equipment see the instruc-
tions on page 162, Accessories, parts replacement and modifications.
Luggage compart
Stowing luggage
All luggage must be se
Please observe the follow
well at all times:
Distribute the load as
Place heavy objects as
as possible.
Secure luggage in the l
on the fastening rings
WARNING
Loose luggage and othe injuries.
Loose objects in the lugg change the way the vehicle
During sudden manoeuv passenger compartment can
Always store objects in t able straps. This is especial
When you transport hea in the centre of gravity can a
Please observe informat
Seats and stowage110
cover
ack can be used for clothing.
nd the rear window heater should never be
lation.
jects on the luggage compartment cover, this upants in case of sudden braking.
ext to the spare wheel, is a removable stowage
oints if you intend to carry loads on the roof:
ggage racks and accessories supplied by offi-
ed.
follow the fitting instructions included for the
fitting the front bar in the allotments designed
en the marks on the upper part of the rear door
rect direction of travel indicated in the installa-
se instructions may lead to paintwork damage
tightening torque of the attachment bolts and
journey. If necessary, retighten the bolts and
s.
cordoba_ingles Seite 110 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Caution Hard objects on the shelf could chafe against the wires of the heating
element in the rear window and cause damage.
Note The ventilation slots in front of the rear side windows must not be covered as
this would prevent stale air being extracted from the vehicle.
Fastening rings*
Four rings are fitted in the boot fig. 82 (see arrows) for securing objects.
Two of the rings are located on the right and left, respectively, of the rear
section of the boot. The other two are next to the loading edge of the boot.
The fastening rings are in accordance with standard DIN 75410
Luggage compartment
The tray behind the rear seat b
The groove between the tray a
covered to allow free air venti
WARNING
Do not place heavy or hard ob will endanger the vehicle occ
Note Below the boot floor trim, n
tray.
Roof carrier*
Please observe the following p
For safety reasons, only lu
cial SEAT Service should be us
It is imperative to precisely
rack, taking special care when
for this and the rear bar betwe
frame while respecting the cor
tion manual. Not following the
or marks on the bodywork.
Pay special attention to the
check them following a short
check them at regular interval
Fig. 82 Fastening rings
Seats and stowage 111
Safety Fir Technical Data
cordoba_ingles Seite 111 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Distribute the load evenly. A maximum load of 40 kg only is permitted for
each roof carrier system support bar, the load must be distributed evenly over
the entire length. However, the maximum load permitted for the entire roof
(including the support system) of 75 kg must not be exceeded nor should the
total weight of the vehicle be exceeded. See the chapter on Technical Data.
When transporting heavy or large objects on the roof, any change in the
normal vehicle behaviour due to a change in the centre of gravity or an
increased wind resistance must be taken into account. For this reason, a suit-
able speed and driving style must be used.
For those vehicles fitted with a sunroof*, ensure that it does not contact
the load on the roof carrier system when opened.
Air conditioning112
ws quickly, is only available when the engine
perature.
speeds with switch . The blower should
eed when driving slowly.
of air in the required direction.
the windscreen. Air recirculation is, for safety
osition.
per body.
ll
dscreen and the footwell.
symbol lights up) prevents strong odours
g the vehicle interior, for example when driving
n traffic .
e is low, using air recirculation mode provides
ting air from the vehicle interior instead of cold
ws should never be fogged up or covered with to ensure good visibility. Please familiarize ration of the heating and ventilation system, functions for the windows.
AB
cordoba_ingles Seite 112 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Air conditioning
Heating
Controls
Using the controls fig. 83 and and with the switch
you can set the temperature, air distribution and the blower
speed.
Press the button to switch air recirculation mode on or off. A
button is illuminated by a yellow lamp for as long as the function
is switched on.
Temperature
Switch sets the temperature. The required temperature inside the vehicle
cannot be lower than the ambient temperature. Maximum heat output, which
is needed to defrost the windo
has reached its operating tem
Blower
The air flow can be set at four
always be set at the lowest sp
Air distribution
Control for setting the flow
Air distribution towards
reasons, not possible in this p
Air distribution to the up
Air distribution to footwe
Air distribution to the win
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation on (button
in the outside air from enterin
through a tunnel or queuing i
When the outside temperatur
more effective heating by hea
air from outside.
WARNING
For your safety, the windo snow or ice. This is essential yourself with the correct ope including the demist/defrost
Fig. 83 On the dash panel: Heater controls
AA AC AB
AD
AA
AC
AD
Air conditioning 113
Safety Fir Technical Data
esired direction using air distribution
utlets.
elector fig. 84 clockwise to select
re.
to speed settings 1-4.
esired direction using air distribution
utlets.
n
elector fig. 84 clockwise to the
.
to setting 4.
.
towards side windows.
and the side windows
elector fig. 84 to the heating zone.
to speed settings 2-3.
.
AA
AA
AB
4
AA
cordoba_ingles Seite 113 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
In air recirculation mode, no air enters the vehicle interior from outside. The windows can quickly fog over if the heating is switched off. Therefore, you should never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for longer periods, as this increases the risk of an accident.
Note Please observe the general notes page 120.
Vehicle ventilation or heating
Ventilating the passenger compartment
Turn the temperature selector fig. 84 anti-clockwise.
Turn blower switch to speed settings 1 -4.
Set the airflow to the d
control .
Open the relevant air o
Heating the interior
Turn the temperature s
the required temperatu
Turn blower switch
Set the airflow to the d
control .
Open the relevant air o
Defrosting the windscree
Turn the temperature s
maximum temperature
Turn the blower switch
Set air distribution to
Close outlet .
Open and turn outlet
Demisting the windscreen
Turn the temperature s
Turn blower switch
Set air distribution to
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 84 On the dash panel: Heater controls
A1
A7
AC
A7
AC
A3
A
A7
Air conditioning114
is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is
e has reached its operating temperature.
re of the engine coolant should be optimum to
functions correctly ( except in vehicles fitted
. 85 Air vent
cordoba_ingles Seite 114 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Close outlets 3 .
Open and turn outlets towards side windows
When the windows are demisted and as a preventive measure, the switch
can be set in position, thus obtaining geater comfort while preventing the
windows from misting again.
Heating system
Maximum heat output, which
only available when the engin
Note Remember that the temperatu
ensure that the heating system
with additional heating*)
Air outlets
A3
A4
AC
Fig
Air conditioning 115
Safety Fir Technical Data
r conditioning (Climatic)
m only works when the engine is running
d on.
ig. 86 and and with the switch
rature, air distribution and the blower
or off, press the appropriate button or
is activated, a warning light on the button
page 116
four speed settings for the blower. The blower
the lowest speed when driving slowly.
Fig. 86 On the instru- ment panel: air condi- tioner controls
AA AC AB
AD
cordoba_ingles Seite 115 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Air distribution
The outlets and can be closed or opened separately and the air flow
directed according to need.
Outlet closed:operating lever in vertical position.
Outlet open:operating lever in horizontal position.
Swivelling the outlet with the operating lever, it is possible to direct the air
output as desired.
Semiautomatic ai
Controls
The air conditioning syste
and the blower is switche
Using the controls f
you can set the tempe
speed.
To switch a function on
. When the function
comes on.
Temperature selector Blower control. There are
should always be set at
Switch on symbol Main air output through outlets:
1,2
5
1, 2, 5
3, 4
AC
A3 A4
AE
AA
AB
Air conditioning116
rior
system using button fig. 87 (the
lector to set the desired temperature.
to one of the settings 1-4.
control to guide the flow of air in the
(to the windscreen), (to the upper
ell) and (to the windscreen and to the
partment
tem with button (the button light
ntrol switch until the desired interior
d.
to one of the settings 1-4.
control to guide the flow of air in the
(to the windscreen), (to the upper
ell) and (to the windscreen and to the
is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is
e has reached its operating temperature.
AC
AA
AC
AC
cordoba_ingles Seite 116 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Air distribution control page 116
Air recirculation button page 117
Button Coolant on button page 116
WARNING
For your safety, the windows should never be fogged up or covered with snow or ice. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarize yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the demist/defrost functions for the windows.
Note Please observe the general notes .
Vehicle interior heating or cooling system
Heating of the vehicle inte
Disconnect the cooling
button light goes off).
Turn the temperature se
We recommend 22C .
Turn the blower switch
Use the air distribution
required direction:
body), (to the footw
footwell).
Cooling the passenger com
Connect the cooling sys
should light up).
Turn the temperature co
temperature is obtaine
Turn the blower switch
Use the air distribution
required direction:
body), (to the footw
footwell).
Heating system
Maximum heat output, which
only available when the engin
AC
AD
AE AC
Fig. 87 On the instru- ment panel: air condi- tioner controls
Air conditioning 117
Safety Fir Technical Data
culation is not possible when the control for air
screen setting .
air enters the vehicle interior from outside. If is switched off, the windows can quickly mist
ever leave the air recirculation mode switched s increases the risk of an accident.
d the air recirculation connects automatically to
st fumes in the vehicle on travelling backwards.
n does not light up.
r conditioning
switched on, the compressor consumes engine
el consumption. Observe the following points
nt operating for a short a time as possible.
verheated due to excessive solar radiation, it is
doors to allow the hot air to escape.
nditioning should not be switched on if the
.*
cordoba_ingles Seite 117 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Cooling system
When the cooling system is switched on, not only the temperature, but also
the air humidity in the vehicle interior is reduced. This improves comfort for
the vehicle occupants and prevents misting of the windows when the outside
air humidity is high.
If the cooling system cannot be switched on this may be due to the following
reasons:
the engine is not running.
The blower is switched off.
The outside temperature is lower than approx. +5C.
the cooling system compressor has been temporarily switched off
because the engine coolant temperature is too high.
The air conditioner fuse is faulty.
Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioner checked by a quali-
fied workshop.
Air recirculation
Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells
from entering the vehicle.
When air recirculation mode is switched on (button page 116, fig. 87
with warning lamp) strong odours in the outside air do not enter the vehicle
interior, for example when passing through a tunnel or in queuing traffic.
When the outside temperature is low, using air recirculation mode provides
more effective heating by heating air from the vehicle interior instead of cold
air from outside.
When the outside temperature is high, using air recirculation mode provides
more effective cooling by cooling air from the vehicle interior instead of warm
air from outside.
For reasons of safety, air recir
distribution is set to the wind
WARNING
In air recirculation mode, no the air conditioning system over. Therefore, you should n on for longer periods, as thi
Note When reverse gear is engage
prevent the entrance of exhau
The control light on the butto
Economic use of the ai
When the air conditioning is
power and has an effect on fu
in order to have the equipme
If the vehicle interior has o
best to open the windows or
When travelling the air co
windows or sun roof are open
Air conditioning118
on
operation)
ted display
ning off)
tor.
tion for the windscreen. The air drawn in from
cted at the windscreen. The air recirculation
be switched off as soon as the defrost function
atures over 3 C, the air conditioning system
atically and the blower speed will be increased
y the air.
c temperature, ventilation and air distribution
. 88 On the instrument panel: Climatronic controls
cordoba_ingles Seite 118 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Climatronic
Control switches
The air conditioning system only works when the engine is running
and the blower is switched on.
Turn the temperature selector fig. 88 to set the desired
temperature.
The functions will be switched on when the buttons are pressed.
When the function is activated, a symbol is displayed on the
screen. Press the button again to switch off the function.
Blower speed control and ON / OFF system.
Blower level indicator
Outside temperature display
Defrost windscreen display
Air recirculation display:
Display for air flow directi
Display AUTO (automatic
Interior temperature selec
Display ECON (air conditio
Interior temperature selec
Button defrost func
outside the vehicle is dire
mode, if switched on, will
is switched on. At temper
will be switched on autom
by one level in order to dr
Button Automati
control page 119
Fig
A10
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12 AUTO
Air conditioning 119
Safety Fir Technical Data
e is quickly reached when a temperature of
atic mode. It can be changed as necessary to
particular circumstances. It is possible to select
8 C (64 F) to +29 C (86 F). If a lower or higher
r HI is displayed on the screen. These are
d the actual temperature may be slightly higher
tside conditions.
tant temperature level fully automatically. The
ed to the interior, the blower speed and the air
omatically. The system also allows for the effect
no need for manual adjustment. Therefore,
best comfort for the vehicle occupants in virtu-
t the year.
off whenever an adjustment is made using the
n, blower or . The temperature continues
n adjust the air temperature, flow, and
e
ns page 118, fig. 88 to , or turn
The display is switched off .
r temperatures from +18 C (64 F) to +29 C
e temperatures and the actual temperature may
pending on the outside conditions.
ECON
A13 A15
A7
cordoba_ingles Seite 119 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Button Air distribution to footwell
Button Air distribution to the upper body.
Button Air distribution to head
Button To connect economic mode. When the button light is on,
the air conditioning is disconnected to save fuel.
Button Manual air recirculation mode
WARNING
For your safety, the windows should never be fogged up or covered with snow or ice. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarize yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the demist/defrost functions for the windows.
Note Please observe the general notes .
Automatic mode
In automatic mode air temperature, flow, and distribution are
automatically regulated so that a specified temperature is
attained as quickly as possible and then maintained.
Switching on automatic mode
Press the button . The display is visible page 118,
fig. 88 .
Turn the temperature selector to set the desired temperature
inside the vehicle. We recommend 22C (72F).
A comfortable interior climat
+22 C (72 F) is set in autom
suit individual preferences or
interior temperatures from +1
temperature is selected, LO o
approximate temperatures an
or lower depending on the ou
Climatronic maintains a cons
temperature of the air suppli
distribution are regulated aut
of strong sunlight, so there is
automatic mode provides the
ally all conditions throughou
Automatic mode is switched
buttons for the air distributio
to be regulated.
Manual mode
In manual mode you ca
distribution yourself.
Switching on manual mod
Press one of the butto
the blower control .
Temperature
It is possible to select interio
(86 F). These are approximat
be slightly higher or lower de
A13
A14
A15
A16 ECON
A17
AUTO
A7
A1
Air conditioning120
ts strong odours in the ambient air from
r example when passing through a tunnel or in
e is low, using air recirculation mode provides
ting air from the vehicle interior instead of cold
is high, using air recirculation mode provides
ing air from the vehicle interior instead of warm
ulation is not possible when the control for air
screen setting .
air enters the vehicle interior from outside. If s switched off, the windows can quickly mist ever leave the air recirculation mode switched increases the risk of an accident.
the air recirculation connects automatically to
st fumes in the vehicle on travelling backwards.
r air recirculation is not displayed.
d particle filter and active carbon filter) serves
in the ambient air, including dust and pollen.
cordoba_ingles Seite 120 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
If a temperature below 18 C (64 F) is selected, the display switches to LO. In
this setting the system runs at maximum cooling output and the temperature
is not regulated.
If a temperature above 29C (86 F) is selected the display switches to HI. In
this setting the system runs at maximum heating output and the temperature
is not controlled.
Blower
The blower can be infinitely adjusted with the blower control . Always have
the blower running at a low setting to ensure a constant flow of fresh air into
the vehicle. If the blower is switched off (no level displayed ) and the
control is turned further to the left, the Climatronic is switched off. In this
caseOFF is displayed on the screen.
Air distribution
The air distribution is adjusted using the buttons , and . It is also
possible to open and close some of the air outlets separately.
Switching the cooling system on and off
Pressing the button switches off the cooling system to save fuel. The
temperature continues to be regulated. The set temperature can then only be
reached if it is higher than the outside temperature.
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells
from entering the vehicle.
Press the button to switch air recirculation mode on or off.
This is ON if the symbol page 118, fig. 88 is displayed
on the screen.
Air recirculation mode preven
entering the vehicle interior, fo
queuing traffic.
When the outside temperatur
more effective heating by hea
air from outside.
When the outside temperature
more effective cooling by cool
air from outside.
For reasons of safety, air recirc
distribution is set to the wind
WARNING
In air recirculation mode, no the air conditioning system i over. Therefore, you should n on for longer periods, as this
Note When reverse gear is engaged
prevent the entrance of exhau
In this case the symbol fo
General notes
The pollution filter
The pollution filter (a combine
as a barrier against impurities
A1
A2
ECON
A5
Air conditioning 121
Safety Fir Technical Data
res the compressor switches off automatically.
switched on either.
the air conditioning at least once a month, to
and prevent leaks. If a decrease in the cooling
orised Service Centre should be consulted to
e system, do not block the grille between the
.
r extreme strain, switch off the compressor for a
cordoba_ingles Seite 121 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
For the air conditioning system to work with maximum efficiency, the pollu-
tion filter must be replaced at the intervals specified in the Service Schedule.
If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to use in areas with very high
levels of air pollution, the pollution filter must be changed more frequently
than stated in the Service Schedule.
Caution If you suspect that the air conditioner is damaged, switch off the air condi-
tioner with button to prevent further damage and have it checked by a
qualified workshop.
Repairs to the air conditioning system require specialist knowledge and
special tools. Therefore, we recommend that you take the vehicle to a quali-
fied workshop should problems occur.
Note If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensa- tion can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and form a pool under-
neath the vehicle, this is completely normal and there is no need to suspect
a leak.
Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and
leaves to ensure heating and cooling is not impaired, and to prevent the
windows misting over.
The air from the vents flows through the passenger compartment and is
extracted by slots designed for this purpose. Do not cover these slots with
articles of clothing or other objects.
The air conditioning system operates most effectively with the windows
and the sliding/tilting roof* closed. However, if the sun has heated up the
vehicle, the air inside can be cooled more quickly by opening the windows for
a short period.
Do not smoke while air recirculation mode is on, as smoke drawn into the
air conditioning system leaves a residue on the evaporator, producing a
permanent unpleasant odour.
At low outside temperatu
The button cannot be
It is advidable to connect
lubricate the system gaskets
capacity is detected, an Auth
check the system.
For correct operation of th
button and the button
When the engine is unde
moment. ECON
AUTO
AUTO
Driving122
the correct position.
e steering column fig. 89 down .
el in this way until the correct position is
again firmly .
ing column adjustment function and an incor- ult in serious injury.
eering column should be adjusted only when k of accident.
Fig. 90 Proper sitting position for driver
cordoba_ingles Seite 122 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Driving
Steering
Adjusting the steering wheel position
The height and reach of the steering wheel can be freely
adjusted to suit the driver.
Adjust the driver seat to
Push the lever under th
Adjust the steering whe
set fig. 90.
Then push the lever up
WARNING
Incorrect use of the steer rect seating position can res
To avoid accidents, the st the vehicle is stationary. Ris
Fig. 89 Adjusting the steering wheel position
Driving 123
Safety Fir Technical Data
programme (ESP)*
safer in certain situations.
rogram (ESP) contains the electronic differential
ntrol system (TCS). The ESP function works in
th warning lamps will light up if the ESP or ABS
ally when the engine is started.
ays be on, but in specific circumstances where
can switch it off by pressing button
hains,
w or on loose surfaces,
Fig. 91 Detail of the centre console: ESP button
cordoba_ingles Seite 123 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Adjust the driver seat or steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least 25 cm between the steering wheel and your breast bone page 122, fig. 90. If you fail to observe the minimum distance, the airbag will not protect you. Risk of fatal injury.
If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact an Authorised Service Centre. The Authorised Service Centre will help you decide if special specific modifica- tions are necessary.
If you adjust the steering wheel so that it points towards your face, the driver airbag will not protect you properly in the event of an accident. Make sure that the steering wheel points towards your chest.
When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel, or on the inside of the rim). In such cases, you could receive severe injuries to the arms, hands and head.
Safety
Electronic stabilisation
ESP helps make driving
The Electronic Stabilisation P
lock (EDL) and the traction co
conjunction with the ABS. Bo
systems are faulty.
The ESP is started automatic
In general, the ESP should alw
you require less traction, you
fig. 91 .
For example:
When driving with snow c
when driving in deep sno
WARNING (continued)
Driving124
key
lock
nition and the engine are OFF and the steering
he ignition key, turn the steering wheel until it
ou should always lock the steering wheel when
ill help prevent theft of the vehicle .
low plug system
sition and let go of the key. If the key cannot be
m position to position , move the
d off the steering lock mechanism) until the key
Fig. 92 Ignition key posi- tions
A0
A1
A0 A12
cordoba_ingles Seite 124 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
when rocking the vehicle backwards and forwards to free it from mud, for
example.
You should press the button to switch the ESP back on when you no longer
need wheel spin.
The TCS and EDL are also switched off if the ESP is switched off. That is to say,
these systems are not available while ESP is not activated.
When does the button light up or flash?
It lights up when the ignition is switched on and should go out again after
about 2 seconds.
It will start flashing to indicate that ESP is counteracting an unstable
driving condition.
It will light up continuously if there is a malfunction in the ESP.
It will light up continuously if the ESP is switched off.
WARNING
The electronic stabilisation program (ESP) cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.
Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Please refer to the corresponding warning notes on ESP in page 139, Intelligent technology.
Ignition lock
Position of the ignition
Ignition switched off, steering
In the position fig. 92 the ig
may be locked.
For the Steering lock without t
locks with an audible sound. Y
you leave your vehicle. This w
Switching on the ignition or g
Turn the ignition key to this po
turned or is difficult to turn fro
steering wheel (to take the loa
turns freely.
Driving 125
Safety Fir Technical Data
ts unauthorised persons from driving
hat deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-
erted into the ignition.
ted again automatically as soon as you pull the
d using a genuine SEAT key with the correct
ed properly if you do not have a genuine SEAT
ping the engine
started using a genuine SEAT key with
the neutral position and depress the
old it in this position, the starter will then
ngine.
the starting position page 124.
cordoba_ingles Seite 125 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Starting
The engine is started when the key is in this position. Electrical components
with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily.
Each time that the vehicle must be started, the ignition key must be turned to
the position . The repetitive start prevention lock of the ignition prevents
possible damage to the starter motor is the engine is already running.
WARNING
Wait for the vehicle to come to a standstill before removing the ignition key from the lock. The steering lock could be activated immediately - Risk of accident!
Always remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to be gone for a short period. This is especially important if you must leave children or disabled people in the vehicle, they could accidentally start the engine or work electrical equipment such as the windows possibly resulting in an accident.
Unsupervised use of the keys could result in the engine being started or electrical systems, such as the electric windows, being used. This can result in serious injury.
Caution The starter motor will only work when the engine is stopped (ignition key
position ).
Electronic immobiliser
The immobiliser preven
the vehicle.
Inside the key there is a chip t
matically when the key is ins
The immobiliser will be activa
key out of the ignition lock.
The engine can only be starte
code.
Note The vehicle cannot be operat
key.
Starting and stop
Starting petrol engines
The engine can only be
the correct code.
Move the gear lever to
clutch pedal fully and h
only have to turn the e
Turn the ignition key to
A2
A0
A2
Driving126
vironment running the engine with the vehicle stationary.
s you start the engine. This helps the engine
aster and reduces emissions.
tarted using a genuine SEAT key with
the neutral position and depress the
old it in this position, the starter will then
gine.
the starting position.
position page 124, fig. 92 . The
light for engine pre-heating.
goes out, turn the key to position to
t press the accelerator.
y as soon as the engine starts, the starter
wed to run on with the engine.
ngine may be a little noisy for the first few
built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.
ause for concern.
the engine, see page 214.
A1
A2
cordoba_ingles Seite 126 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Let go of the ignition key as soon as the engine starts; the starter
motor must not be allowed to run on with the engine.
After starting a very hot engine, you may need to press the accelerator briefly.
When starting from cold, the engine may be a little noisy for the first few
seconds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.
This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.
If the engine does not start immediately, switch off the starter after about
10 seconds and try again after about half a minute. If the engine still does not
start, the fuel pump fuse should be checked page 197, Fuses.
WARNING
Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of consciousness. It can also cause death.
Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.
Never use cold start sprays, they could explode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Risk of injury.
Caution When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at
full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.
The vehicle should not be pushed or towed for more than approximately
50 metres to start the engine. Fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
damage it.
Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle to start it, you should first
try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow the instruc-
tions page 214, Jump-starting.
For the sake of the en Do not warm-up the engine by
You should drive off as soon a
reach operating temperature f
Starting diesel engines
The engine can only be s
the correct code.
Move the gear lever to
clutch pedal fully and h
only have to turn the en
Turn the ignition key to
Turn the ignition key to
indication lamp will
When the warning lamp
start the engine. Do no
Let go of the ignition ke
motor must not be allo
When starting from cold, the e
seconds until oil pressure has
This is quite normal, and no c
If there are problems starting
Driving 127
Safety Fir Technical Data
nvironment y running the engine with the vehicle stationary.
as you start the engine. This helps the engine
faster and reduces emissions.
e
position page 124, fig. 92 .
ff the radiator fan may run on for up to 10
s switched off. It is also possible that it will turn
perature of the coolant increases due to the
the engine compartment or if this is heated due
heat of the sun.
ine until the vehicle is stationary.
nly when the engine is running. You will need ehicle when the engine is switched off. As you anner, there is a greater risk of accidents and
gage immediately when the key is removed ehicle cannot be steered. Risk of accident.
A0
cordoba_ingles Seite 127 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Glow plug system for the diesel engine
To avoid unnecessary load on the battery, do not use any other major elec-
trical equipment while the glow plugs are pre-heating.
Start the engine as soon as the glow plug warning lamp page 63 goes out.
Starting the engine after the fuel tank has been completely run dry
If the fuel tank has been completely run dry, it may take longer than normal
(up to one minute) to start the engine after refuelling with diesel fuel. This is
because the system must eliminate air first.
WARNING
Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of consciousness. It can also cause death.
Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.
Never use cold start sprays, they could explode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Risk of injury.
Caution When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at
full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.
The vehicle should not be pushed or towed for more than approximately
50 metres to start the engine. Fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
damage it.
Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle to start it, you should first
try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow the instruc-
tions page 214, Jump-starting.
For the sake of the e Do not warm-up the engine b
You should drive off as soon
reach operating temperature
Switching off the engin
Stopping the engine.
Turn the ignition key to
After the engine is switched o
minutes, even if the ignition i
itself on once more if the tem
elimination of built up heat in
to prolonged exposure to the
WARNING
Never switch off the eng
The brake servo works o more strength to brake the v cannot brake in the normal m serious injury.
The steering lock can en from the ignition lock. The v
Driving128
e left, and then into the reverse position
.
may include a 6-speed manual gearbox, the
stick.
ged when the car is at a standstill. With the
6 seconds with the clutch depressed before
protect the gearbox.
when the reverse gear is selected and the igni-
ng, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a ch released.
ear when the vehicle is in motion. Risk of acci-
e gear lever when driving. The pressure of your
ear on the selector forks in the gearbox.
should always depress the clutch fully to avoid
e.
e clutch on hills. This causes premature wear
cordoba_ingles Seite 128 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Caution If the engine has been driven hard for a long period, the engine could over-
heat when it is switched off. Risk of engine damage. For this reason, you
should idle the engine for approx. 2 minutes before you switch it off.
Manual gearbox
Driving a car with a manual gearbox
Selecting the reverse gear
The vehicle should be stationary with the engine idling. Press the
clutch right down.
Place the gear lever into neutral gate and push the lever all the
way down.
Slide the gearstick to th
shown on the gearstick
Certain versions of the model
diagram is shown on the gear
Reverse gear can only be enga
engine running, wait approx.
engaging this gear, in order to
The reversing lights come on
tion is on.
WARNING
When the engine is runni gear is engaged and the clut
Never select the reverse g dent.
Note Do not rest your hand on th
hand could cause premature w
When changing gear, you
unnecessary wear and damag
Do not hold the car on th
and damage to the clutch.
Fig. 93 Central Console: diagram of 5-speed manual gearbox
Driving 129
Safety Fir Technical Data
on the driving resistance, be selected automat-
ulling power, thus avoiding having to shift gear
cordoba_ingles Seite 129 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Automatic gearbox*
Gearbox programs
The automatic gearbox has two gearbox programmes.
The gearbox management system is equipped with two driving programmes.
Depending on the driver or the driving situation, either a consumption
oriented programme or a more sporty programme will be selected.
The programme selection will be carried out automatically depending on how
the accelerator is used.
The consumption-oriented programme will be selected if you use the
accelerator slowly or normally. This means that the gearbox will shift up
earlier and down later.
A more sporty driving programme which shifts up gear later will be
selected if you use the accelerator more quickly.
Note A programme will, depending
ically that guarantees more p
constantly.
Fig. 94 Section of centre console: selector lever on cars with an automatic gearbox
Driving130
leased as follows:
e pedal and press the selector lever lock
or lever at the same time.
ver form blocking, on gently passing through
R to D). This makes it possible, if the car is
ng it. Only when the lever is in position N for
ressing the brake, does the lever block come
selector lever lock is automatically blocked in
arking the vehicle. To engage and disengage P
tick knob and depress the brake pedal, while
be unlocked by pressing the knob button.
when the vehicle is at a standstill and the
g position R, starting from position P or N,
ress the button on the gearstick knob.
ition on, the reversing lights come on.
cordoba_ingles Seite 130 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Selector lever lock functions
The selector lever lock in position P or N prevents gears from
being engaged inadvertently, which would cause the vehicle
to move.
The selector lever lock is re
Switch on the ignition.
Press and hold the brak
on the left of the select
A delay device prevents the le
position N (for example, from
stuck, to remove it by swingi
more than 1 second, without p
into operation.
At speeds of over 5 km/h the
position N
Selector lever positions
P - parking lock
This is the correct position for p
press the button on the gears
the car is running.
If the car is not running, it can
R - reverse gear
This should only be engaged
engine idling. Before engagin
depress the brake pedal and p
In position R and with the ign
Fig. 95 Section of centre console: selector lever on cars with an automatic gearbox
Fig. 96 Instrument panel display: selector lever locked in position P
Driving 131
Safety Fir Technical Data
ced in positions 3, 2 and 1 when the change is
matic gearbox does not change to a lower gear
ns is appropriate.
acceleration. When the accelerator is
d depending on the vehicle speed and engine
aged. As soon as the maximum engine speed
ext gear up is engaged.
eels may skid if the kick-down featue is acti- slippery roads. Danger of skidding!
d when the selector lever is at N or
l and the engine is running, always depress the
a range.
g a range when the engine is at a standstill
cordoba_ingles Seite 131 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
N - neutral (idling)
To take the lever out of position N at speeds of below 5 km/h or when the car
is at a standstill but the ignition is switched on, depress the brake pedal and
press the lock button on the gearstick knob.
D - Drive (forwards)
The four gears automatically change up or down, depending on engine load
and vehicle speed.
In certain conditions it is preferable to place the selector lever provisionally in
one of the positions described below:
3 - Position for uneven surfaces
Gears 1st, 2nd and 3rd automatically change up or down depending on the
engine load and vehicle speed. 4th gear is blocked. This increases the engine
braking effect when decelerating.
This position is recommended when in position D and under certain driving
conditions, there are frequent changes between 3rd and 4th.
2 - Position for hilly roads
Position recommended for long slopes.
1st and 2nd gear change automatically depending on engine load and
vehicle speed. 3rd and 4th do not operate.
1 - Position for very steep slopes or manoeuvres
Recommended position for extreme slopes.
The vehicle only travels in 1st gear. 2nd, 3rd and 4th are blocked.
The cruise control* can not be used in position 1.
Caution Never move the selector lever to R or P when driving. This could damage the
gearbox. Risk of accident!
Note The selector lever can be pla
made manually, but the auto
until the number of revolutio
Kick-down feature
This system allows maximum
depressed to full throttle, an
speed, the lowest gear is eng
for that gear is reached, the n
WARNING
Remember that the drive wh vated when driving on icy or
Instructions for driving
Starting
The engine can only be starte
P page 125.
Selecting a range
When the car is at a standstil
brake pedal before selecting
Do not accelerate on selectin
Driving132
matically engage gears.
ed manually. 3rd gear is only available in posi-
r lever.
ctor lever 1st gear and reverse gear are available
ired to work more, especially due to the lack of
e gearbox oil may overheat. In this case,
e Centre as soon as possible.
cle must always be held with the foot brake This is because an automatic gearbox still g speed, and the vehicle tends to creep.
ndstill and the engine is idling, a range is ccelerate accidentally (for example, when rtment), as the car will start to move immedi-
ng engine, place the selector lever in position
m moving out of control, the handbrake en the vehicle is at a standstill. In addition sition P.
cordoba_ingles Seite 132 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
If, while driving, the selector lever accidentally moves to position N, first
release the accelerator pedal and wait until the engine slows to idling before
selecting a forwards gear .
Starting
Select a range (R, D, 3, 2, 1). Wait until the change has taken place and the
power transmission of the drive wheels has stabilised (slight pressure is
noticeable). Then depress the accelerator.
Stopping
In the case of a temporary stop, for example at a traffic lights, it is not neces-
sary to move to position N, it is sufficent to brake using the brake pedal. The
engine should only run at idle speed.
Parking
On slopes, first pull handbrake on firmly and then connect block. This
prevents overloading the blocking mechanism, making the subsequent
disconnection easier .
Emergency start
in vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox the engine can not be started by
towing or pushing the vehicle page 217.
If the vehicle battery is flat, a battery from another car can be used to jump-
start the car using a set of jump leads page 125.
Towing
If the vehicle requires towing at any time, observe the instructions of
page 217, Towing and tow-starting
Back-up programme
In the event of a malfunction of the gearbox electronics, emergency
programmes are activated, according to the type of fault.
The gearbox continues to connect gears automatically, but the operations
are jerky. Consult the Authorised Service Centre.
The gearbox does not auto
In this case they can be chang
tions D, 3 and 2 of the selecto
In positions 1 and R of the sele
respectively as normal
As the torque converter is requ
2nd gear, it is possible that th
consult the Authorised Servic
WARNING
In all the ranges the vehi when the engine is running. transmits power even at idlin
If, when the car is at a sta connected, take care not to a working in the engine compa ately.
Before working on a runni P and apply the handbrake.
To prevent the vehicle fro should always be applied wh move the selector lever to po
Driving 133
Safety Fir Technical Data
firmly. This prevents you driving with the hand-
lights up when the handbrake is applied
. The warning lamp goes out when the hand-
to slow down the vehicle when it is in motion. iderably longer, as braking is only applied to dent!
sed this will cause overheating of the rear e function of the brake system and could lead ses premature wear on the rear brake
before you leave the vehicle. The first gear
always be firmly applied when the
points when parking the vehicle:
top the vehicle.
lso be selected.
cordoba_ingles Seite 133 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Handbrake
Using the handbrake
The handbrake should be applied firmly to prevent the
vehicle from accidentally rolling away.
Always apply the handbrake when you leave your vehicle and when
you park.
Applying the handbrake
Pull the handbrake lever up firmly fig. 97.
Releasing the handbrake
Pull the lever up slightly and press the locking knob in the direc-
tion of the arrow fig. 97 and guide the handbrake lever down
fully .
Always apply the handbrake
brake applied .
The handbrake warning lamp
and the ignition switched on
brake is released.
WARNING
Never use the handbrake The braking distance is cons the rear wheels. Risk of acci
If it is only partially relea brakes, which can impair th to an accident. This also cau pads/linings.
Caution Always apply the handbrake
should also be selected.
Parking
The handbrake should
vehicle is parked.
Always note the following
Use the foot brake to s
Apply the handbrake.
The first gear should a
Fig. 97 Handbrake between the front seats
Driving134
tem (CCS)*
is able to maintain the set speed in
30 km/h to 180 km/h.
en saved, you may take your foot off the accel-
the cruise control system if it is not possible
ise control system should not be used in bends or where roads conditions are poor pings, slippery surfaces, snow). Risk of acci-
when you have finished using it. This will ke.
t speed which is too high for the current road, . Risk of accident.
tain a constant speed when descending gradi-
te under its own weight. Use the foot brake to
cordoba_ingles Seite 134 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition lock.
Turn the steering wheel slightly to engage the steering lock.
Always take you car keys with you when you leave the vehicle
.
Additional notes on parking the vehicle on gradients:
Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle would roll against the kerb if it did
start to roll.
If the vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front wheels so that they point
towards the kerb.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn the front wheels so that they point away
from the kerb.
Secure the vehicle as normal by applying the handbrake firmly and
selecting first gear.
WARNING
Take measures to reduce the risk of injury when you leave your vehicle unattended.
Never park where the hot exhaust system could ignite inflammable materials, such as dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.
Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in the vehicle when it is locked. They would be unable to open the vehicle from the inside, and could become trapped in the vehicle in an emergency. In the event of an emergency, locked doors will delay assistance to occupants.
Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could set the vehicle in motion, for example, by releasing the handbrake or the gear lever / selector lever.
Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.
Cruise control sys
Description
The cruise control system
the range from approx.
Once the speed setting has be
erator.
WARNING
It could be dangerous to use to drive at constant speed.
For safety reasons the cru dense traffic, in sections with (e.g. aquaplaning, loose chip dent.
Always switch off the CCS prevent you using it by mista
It is dangerous to use a se traffic or weather conditions
Note The cruise control cannot main
ents. The vehicle will accelera
slow the vehicle.
Driving 135
Safety Fir Technical Data
T of the rocker switch fig. 99 once
reached the speed you wish to set.
switch, the current speed is set and held
Fig. 99 Turn signal and main beam lever: switch and rocker switch for CCS
AA
cordoba_ingles Seite 135 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Switching the cruise control system on and off
Switching on the system
Push the switch fig. 98 to the left to ON.
Switching off system
Either push the switch to the right to OFF or turn the ignition
off when the vehicle is stationary.
Setting speed*
Press the lower part SE briefly when you have
When you release the rocker
constant.
Fig. 98 Turn signal and main beam lever: Switch and rocker switch for CCS
AB
AB
Driving136
the accelerator and then release the pedal, the
ore the set speed. This will not be the case,
is more than 10 km/h higher than the stored
es. The speed will have to be stored again.
tched off if you reduce speed by depressing the
e the control by pressing once on the upper part
ig. 100 .
peed which is too high for the current road, . Risk of accident.
mporarily*
be switched off in the following situations:
ssed,
AA
Fig. 101 Turn signal and main beam lever: switch and rocker switch for CCS
cordoba_ingles Seite 136 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Adjusting set speed*
The speed can be altered without touching the accelerator or
the brake.
Setting a higher speed
Press the upper part RES+ of the rocker switch fig. 100 to
increase the speed. The vehicle will continue to accelerate for as
long as you keep the rocker switch pressed. When you release
the switch, the new speed is stored.
Setting a lower speed
Press the lower part SET of the rocker switch to reduce the
speed. The vehicle will automatically reduce its speed for as long
as you keep the switch pressed. When you release the switch, the
new speed is stored.
When you increase speed with
system will automatically rest
however, if the vehicle speed
speed for longer than 5 minut
Control of the set speed is swi
brake pedal. You can reactivat
of the rocker switch RES+ f
WARNING
It is dangerous to use a set s traffic or weather conditions
Switching off system te
The cruise control system will
if the brake pedal is depre
Fig. 100 Turn signal and main beam lever: switch and rocker switch for CCS
AA
AA
Driving 137
Safety Fir Technical Data
ox
itched off by moving the control to the limit
r when the vehicle is at a standstill, by discon-
earbox
ystem place the selector lever in one of the
r 1 or when the vehicle is at a standstill, turn off
AA
cordoba_ingles Seite 137 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
if the clutch pedal is depressed,
if the vehicle is accelerated to over 180 km/h,
when the lever is moved in the direction of OFF without fully being
inserted.
To resume the cruise control, release the brake or clutch pedal or reduce the
vehicle speed to less than 180 km/h and press once on the upper part of the
rocker switch RES page 136, fig. 101 .
WARNING
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road, traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.
Completely switching off the system
Vehicles with a manual gearb
The system is completely sw on the right (OFF engaged), o
necting the ignition.
Vehicles with an automatic g
To completely switch off the s
following positions: P, N, R o
the ignition.
AB
AA
Fig. 102 Turn signal and main beam lever: switch and rocker switch for CCS
cordoba_ingles Seite 138 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Intelligent technology 139
Safety Fir Technical Data
venes here, if you press the brake pedal very
m registers an emergency situation. It then very
ke pressure so that the ABS can be activated
thus reducing the braking distance.
n the brake pedal. The brake assist system
soon as you release the brake.
gher if you drive too fast, if you do not keep in front, and when the road surface is slippery nt risk cannot be reduced by the brake assist
cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery and n with the brake assist system! Therefore, it is r speed to suit the road and traffic conditions. atures tempt you into taking any risks when
cordoba_ingles Seite 139 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Tips and Maintenance
Intelligent technology
Brakes
Brake servo
The brake servo amplifies the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. It works
only when the engine is running.
If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle has
to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder to
make up for the lack of servo assistance.
WARNING
The braking distance can also be affected by external factors.
Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. Failure to do so could result in an accident. The braking distance is increased considerably as the brake servo does not function.
If the brake servo is not functioning, for example if the vehicle is being towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder than normal.
Brake assist system (BAS)*
In an emergency, most drivers brake in time, but not with maximum force.
This results in unnecessarily long braking distances.
The brake assist system inter
quickly, the brake assist syste
quickly builds up the full bra
more quickly and efficiently,
Do not reduce the pressure o
switches off automatically as
WARNING
The risk of accident is hi your distance to the vehicle or wet. The increased accide system.
The brake assist system wet roads are dangerous eve essential that you adjust you Do not let the extra safety fe driving.
Intelligent technology140
is also determined by the tyres fitted
es are modified, the effectiveness of the ABS
(TCS)*
em prevents the drive wheels from
s accelerating. The system includes
he traction control system during acceleration
help prevent the drive wheels of front-wheel
during acceleration. The system works in the
tion with ABS. If a malfunction should occur in
ut of action.
oving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-
y otherwise be difficult or even impossible.
tically when the engine is started. If necessary,
hing the button on the centre console.
ng lamp is lit. The TCS should normally be left
in exceptional circumstances, when slipping of
it be disconnected, for example
pare wheel.
ns.
or on loose surfaces
d-down, to free it by rocking.
cordoba_ingles Seite 140 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Anti-lock brake system and traction control ABS
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking
during braking.
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) is an important part of the vehicles active
safety system.
How the ABS works
If one of the wheels is turning too slowly in relation to the road speed, and is
close to locking, the system will reduce the braking pressure for this wheel.
The driver is made aware of this control process by a pulsating of the brake pedal and audible noise. This is a deliberate warning to the driver that one or
more of the wheels is tending to lock and the ABS control function has inter-
vened. In this situation it is important to keep the brake pedal fully depressed
so the ABS can regulate the brake application. Do not pump.
If you brake hard on a slippery road surface, the best possible control is
retained as the wheels do not lock.
However, ABS will not necessarily guarantee shorter braking distances in all
conditions. The braking distance could even be longer if you brake on gravel
or on fresh snow covering a slippery surface.
WARNING
The anti-lock brake system cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are dangerous even with ABS! If you notice that the ABS is working (to counteract locked wheels under braking), you should reduce speed immediately to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving.
The effectiveness of ABS page 185.
If the running gear or brak could be severely limited.
Traction control system
The traction control syst
spinning when the car i
ABS
Description and operation of t (TCS)
TCS reduces engine power to
drive vehicles losing traction
entire speed range in conjunc
the ABS, the TCS will also be o
TCS helps the vehicle to start m
pery conditions where this ma
The TCS is switched on automa
it may be turned on or off pus
When the TCS is off, the warni
switched on at all times. Only
the wheels is required, should
With compact temporary s
When using the snow chai
When driving in deep snow
When the vehicle is bogge
WARNING (continued)
Intelligent technology 141
Safety Fir Technical Data
m (ESP)*
idding by braking the wheels individually.
wheel angle and road speed to calculate the
by the driver, and constantly compares them
the vehicle. If the desired course is not being
e car is starting to skid), then the ESP compen-
g the appropriate wheel.
ed wheel bring the vehicle back to a stable
s to oversteer, the system will act on the front
urn.
hat ESP cannot defy the laws of physics. This ticularly on slippery and wet roads and when
g style to suit the condition of the roads and let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you riving, this can cause accidents.
P functions correctly, all four wheels must be
y differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can
ngine power when this is not desired.
le (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running
cting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-
nd TCS.
button page 123.
cordoba_ingles Seite 141 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
The TCS should be switched on again afterwards as soon as possible.
WARNING
It must be remembered that TCS cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.
Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by TCS tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Caution In order to ensure that TCS function correctly, all four wheels must be
fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can
cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.
Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running
gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-
ciency of the ABS and TCS.
Electronic stabilisation program (ESP)*
General notes
The electronic stabilisation program increases the vehicles
stability on the road.
The electronic stabilisation program helps to reduce the danger of skidding.
The electronic stabilisation programme (ESP) consists of ABS, EDL and TCS.
Electronic Stabilising Progra
ESP reduces the danger of sk
The system uses the steering
changes of direction desired
with the actual behaviour of
maintained (for instance, if th
sates automatically by brakin
The forces acting on the brak
condition. If the vehicle tend
wheel on the outside of the t
WARNING
It must be remembered t should be kept in mind, par towing a trailer.
Always adapt your drivin the traffic situation. Do not into taking any risks when d
Caution In order to ensure that ES
fitted with the same tyres. An
cause the system to reduce e
Modifications to the vehic
gear or any components affe
ciency of the ABS, EDL, ESP a
Note To disconnect using the ESP
Intelligent technology142
style to suit road conditions and the traffic safety afforded by EDL tempt you into taking an cause accidents.
. g. to the engine, the brake system, running
ing the wheels and tyres) could affect the oper-
tem (TCS)
vents the drive wheels from spinning when the
0.
cordoba_ingles Seite 142 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking during
braking page 140.
Electronic differential lock (EDL)*
The electronic differential lock helps prevent the loss of trac-
tion caused if one of the driven wheels starts spinning.
EDL helps the vehicle to start moving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-
pery conditions where this may otherwise be difficult or even impossible.
The system will control the revolutions of the drive wheels using the ABS
sensors (in case of an EDL fault the warning lamp for ABS lights up)
page 65.
At speeds of up to approximately 80 km/h, it is able to balance out differ-
ences in the speed of the driven wheels of approximately 100 rpm caused by
a slippery road surface on one side of the vehicle. It does this by braking the
wheel which has lost traction and distributing more driving force to the other
driven wheel via the differential.
To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts
out automatically if subjected to excessive loads. The vehicle will continue to
function normally without EDL. For this reason, the driver is not informed that
the EDL has been switched off.
The EDL will switch on again automatically when the brake has cooled down.
WARNING
When accelerating on a slippery surface, for example on ice and snow, press the accelerator carefully. Despite EDL, the driven wheels may start to spin. This could impair the vehicles stability.
Always adapt your driving situation. Do not let the extra any risks when driving, this c
Caution Modifications to the vehicle (e
gear or any components affect
ation of the EDL page 162.
The traction control sys
The traction control system pre
car is accelerating page 14
WARNING (continued)
Driving and the environment 143
Safety Fir Technical Data
rake pads
n-in carefully in the first 500 km. New
un-in carefully in the first 200 km.
can compensate for the reduced braking effect
the brake pedal. If you need to make an emer-
nce will be longer with new brake pads than with
run-in.
ximum grip to start with, and require running- isk. Drive particularly carefully in the first 500
run in and do not have the correct friction 00 km. However, the reduced braking capacity ssing on the brake pedal a little harder.
ing distance
braking distance are influenced by
oad conditions.
epends directly on the brake pad wear. The rate
ends to a great extent on the conditions under
and the way the vehicle is driven. If you often
ort distances or have a sporty driving style, we
e thickness of your brake pads checked by an
cordoba_ingles Seite 143 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Driving and the environment
Running-in
Running in a new engine
The engine needs to be run-in over the first 1,500 km.
Up to 1,000 kilometres
Do not drive faster than three quarters of top speed.
Do not accelerate hard.
Avoid high engine revolutions.
Do not tow a trailer.
From 1000 to 1500 km
Speeds can be gradually increased to the maximum road speed
or maximum permissible engine speed (rpm).
During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is
greater than later on when all the moving parts have bedded in.
For the sake of the environment If the engine is run in gently, the life of the engine will be increased and its oil
consumption reduced.
Running in tyres and b
New tyres should be ru
brake pads should be r
During the first 200 km, you
by applying more pressure to
gency stop, the braking dista
brake pads which have been
WARNING
New tyres do not give ma in. This may be an accident r km.
New brake pads must be properties during the first 2 may be compensated by pre
Braking effect and brak
The braking effect and
driving situations and r
The efficiency of the brakes d
of wear of the brake pads dep
which the vehicle is operated
drive in town traffic, drive sh
recommend that you have th
Driving and the environment144
front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the erheat. Observe the relevant instructions s page 162, Modifications.
braking distance will be increased consider- kshop immediately and avoid unnecessary
r*
of the catalytic converter
etrol.
dry.
do not replenish with too much engine oil
up engine oil .
o start it, use jump leads if necessary
running or loss of power when the vehicle is
iately and have the vehicle inspected at the
general, the exhaust warning lamp will light
symptoms occur page 60. If this happens,
aust system and escape into the environment.
o be damaged by overheating.
cordoba_ingles Seite 144 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Authorised Service Centre more frequently than recommended in the Service
Schedule.
If you drive with wet brakes, for example after driving through water, after
heavy rainfall or after washing the car, the braking effect will be reduced as
the brake discs will be wet, or possibly frozen (in winter): the brakes must be
dried through careful braking.
The brake fluid must be changed every two years at the latest. Heavy use of
the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for
too long. This prevents the brakes developing their full braking effect.
WARNING
Longer braking distances and faults in the brake system increase the risk of accidents.
New brake pads must be run in and do not have the correct friction during the first 200 km. However, the reduced braking capacity may be compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder. This also applies when new brake pads are fitted.
If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are driving on roads which have been gritted with salt, braking power may set in later than normal.
On steep descents if the brakes are excessively used they will over heat Before driving down a long steep gradient, it is advisable to reduce speed and change to a lower gear (or move the selector lever to a lower gear if your vehicle has automatic transmission). This makes use of engine braking and relieves the brakes.
Never let the brakes rub by applying light pressure. Continuous braking will cause the brakes to overheat and will increase the braking distance. Apply and then release the brakes alternately.
Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. The braking distance is increased considerably as the brake servo does not function.
Very heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for too long. This impairs the braking effect.
Non-standard or damaged brakes and cause them to ov before purchasing accessorie
If a brake circuit fails, the ably. Contact a qualified wor journeys.
Catalytic converte
To conserve the useful life
Always use unleaded p
Do not run the fuel tank
For engine oil changes,
page 175, Topping
Never tow the vehicle t
page 214.
If you notice misfiring, uneven
moving, reduce speed immed
nearest qualified workshop. In
up when any of the described
unburnt fuel can enter the exh
The catalytic converter can als
WARNING (continued)
Driving and the environment 145
Safety Fir Technical Data
atalytic converter ensure that unleaded petrol is
the chapter Refuelling. Automobile organisa-
out service station networks selling unleaded
ssible that a vehicle model is sold under condi-
are not available or that the Authorised Service
ited repairs.
ors will gladly provide information about the
vehicle in addition to necessary maintenance
dlights
nd drive vehicle in a left-hand drive country, or
pped beam headlights will dazzle oncoming
t apply stickers to certain parts of the headlight
available from your Authorised Service
cordoba_ingles Seite 145 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
WARNING
The catalytic converter reaches very high temperatures! Risk of fire.
Never park where the catalytic converter could come into contact with dry grass or inflammable materials under the vehicle.
Do not apply additional underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust system. These materials could catch fire when the vehicle is driven.
Caution Never fully drain the fuel tank, in this case, the irregularity of the fuel supply
may cause ignition problems. This allows unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust
system, which could cause overheating and damage the catalytic converter.
For the sake of the environment Even when the emission control system is working perfectly, there may be a
smell of sulphur from the exhaust under some conditions. This depends on
the sulphur content of the fuel used. Quite often the problem can be reme-
died by changing to another brand of fuel.
Driving abroad
Notes
For driving abroad, the following must be taken into consideration:
For vehicles fitted with a c
available for the journey. See
tions will have information ab
fuel.
In some countries it is po
tions where some spare parts
Centre may only carry out lim
SEAT importers and distribut
technical preparation of your
and repair possibilities.
Adhesive strips for hea
If you have to drive a right-ha
vice versa, the asymmetric di
traffic.
To prevent dazzling, you mus
lenses. Further information is
Centre.
Driving and the environment146
t, if you are changing from driving on the right-
e fig. 104.
hts for driving on the right
Fig. 105 Right headlight
Fig. 106 Left headlight
cordoba_ingles Seite 146 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Adjusting simple headlights for driving on the left
On the right hand side headlight, if you are changing from driving on the
right-hand side to the left-hand side fig. 103.
On the left hand side headligh
hand side to the left-hand sid
Covering simple headlig
Fig. 103 Right headlight
Fig. 104 Left headlight
Driving and the environment 147
Safety Fir Technical Data
are changing from driving on the right-hand side
07.
re changing from driving on the right-hand side
08.
Fig. 108 Left headlight
cordoba_ingles Seite 147 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
On the right headlight, if you are changing from driving on the left-hand side
to the right-hand side.
On the left headlight, if you are changing from driving on the left-hand side to
the right-hand side.
Covering bifocal headlamps for driving on the left
On the right headlight, if you
to the left-hand side fig. 1
On the left headlight, if you a
to the left-hand side fig. 1
Fig. 107 Right headlight
Driving and the environment148
changing from driving on the left-hand side to
.
s for driving on the left
Fig. 111 Right headlight
Fig. 112 Left headlight
cordoba_ingles Seite 148 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Covering bifocal headlamps for driving on the right
On the right headlight, if you are changing from driving on the left-hand side
to the right-hand side fig. 109.
On the left headlight, if you are
the right-hand side fig. 110
Covering GDL headlamp
Fig. 109 Right headlight
Fig. 110 Left headlight
Driving and the environment 149
Safety Fir Technical Data
are changing from driving on the left-hand side
113.
e changing from driving on the left-hand side to
4.
ear in mind when towing a trailer?
tow a trailer when fitted with the correct equip-
ctory-fitted towing bracket it will already have
ifications and meet the statutory requirements
sterior fitting of a trailer towing bracket see
Fig. 114 Left headlight
cordoba_ingles Seite 149 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
On the right headlight, if you are changing from driving on the right-hand side
to the left-hand side page 148, fig. 111.
On the left headlight, if you are changing from driving on the right-hand side
to the left-hand side page 148, fig. 112.
Covering GDL headlamps for driving on the right
On the right headlight, if you
to the right-hand side fig.
On the left headlight, if you ar
the right-hand side fig. 11
Trailer towing
What do you need to b
Your vehicle may be used to
ment.
If the car is supplied with a fa the necessary technical mod
for towing a trailer. For the po page 164.
Fig. 113 Right headlight
Driving and the environment150
um permissible pressure shown on the sticker
lap. Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in
nufacturer's recommendations.
ough of the road behind the trailer with the
the case you should have additional mirrors
ould be mounted on hinged extension
give sufficient vision to the rear.
railer. This could result in fatal accidents.
itional demands on the vehicle. We recom-
een the normal inspection intervals if the
towing a trailer.
egulations apply to towing a trailer in your
bracket*
towing bracket is located in the tool
with instructions on fitting and removing the
acket.
cordoba_ingles Seite 150 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Connectors
Your vehicle is fitted with a 12-pin connector for the electrical connection
between the trailer and the vehicle.
If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to use an adapter cable. This is
available from any Technical Service.
Trailer weight / draw bar loading
Never exceed the authorised towing limit. If you do not load the trailer up to
the maximum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb correspondingly
steeper gradients.
The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to
1,000 m above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and
therefore the vehicle's climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced
air density. The maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The
weight of the vehicle and trailer combination must be reduced by 10% for
every further 1,000m (or part thereof). The gross combination weight is the
actual weight of the laden vehicle plus the actual weight of the laden trailer.
Where possible, operate the trailer with the maximum permitted draw bar weight on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified
limit.
The figures for trailer weights and draw bar weights that are given on the
data plate of the towing bracket are for certification purposes only. The
correct figures for your specific model, which may be lower than these figures
for the towing bracket, are given in the registration documents and
Section Technical data.
Distributing the load
Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as
possible. Loads carried in the trailer must be secured to prevent them
moving.
Tyre pressure
Set tyre pressure to the maxim
on the inside of the fuel tank f
accordance with the trailer ma
Exterior mirrors
Check whether you can see en
standard mirrors. If this is not
fitted. Both exterior mirrors sh
brackets. Adjust the mirrors to
WARNING
Never transport people in a t
Note Towing a trailer places add
mend additional services betw
vehicle is used frequently for
Find out whether special r
country.
Ball coupling of towing
The ball coupling of the
box
The ball coupling is provided
ball coupling of the towing br
Driving and the environment 151
Safety Fir Technical Data
ot weather with the engine running fast in a low
on the coolant temperature gauge page 51.
ram*
en towing a trailer. The ESP* makes it easier to
snake.
ally and with respect for the
nds largely on your personal driving
l impact and wear on the engine, brakes and
factors:
er, road surface)
riving style and anticipating the traffic situation
fuel consumption by 10-15%. This section
ng the impact on the environment and reducing
me time.
cordoba_ingles Seite 151 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
WARNING
The towing bracket ball coupling must be stored securely in the luggage compartment to prevent them being flung through the vehicle and causing injury.
Note By law, the ball coupling must be removed if a trailer is not being towed
and it obscures the number plate.
Driving tips
Driving with a trailer always requires extra care.
Weight distribution
The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very
unfavourable. However, if this cannot be avoided, drive extra slowly to allow
for the unbalanced weight distribution.
Speed
The stability of the vehicle and trailer is reduced with increasing speed. For
this reason it is advisable not to drive at the maximum permissible speed in
unfavourable road, weather or wind conditions. This applies especially when
driving downhill.
You should always reduce speed immediately if the trailer shows the slightest
sign of snaking. Never try to stop the snaking by increasing speed.
Always brake in good time. If the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the
brakes gently at first and then firmly. This will prevent the jerking that can be
caused by the trailer wheels locking. Select a low gear in good time before
going down a steep descent. This enables you to use the engine braking to
slow down the vehicle.
Heating
When climbing long hills in h
gear, you should keep an eye
Electronic Stabilisation Prog
Do not switch off the ESP* wh
stabilise if the trailer starts to
Driving economic environment
General notes
Fuel consumption depe
style.
Fuel economy, environmenta
tyres depend largely on three
Personal driving style
Conditions of use (weath
Technical requirements
By adopting an economical d
ahead, you can easily reduce
suggests methods of lesseni
your operating costs at the sa
Driving and the environment152
erter need to reach their proper working ise fuel consumption and emissions.
engine uses about 50-70 litres of fuel per
s to 20-30 litres per 100 km after about one
ches its working temperature after about four
ption will return to a normal level. You should
.
a decisive influence.
erent rates of fuel consumption for the same
0 C. Your vehicle will use more fuel in winter
Fig. 115 Fuel consump- tion in litres per 100 km at two different ambient temperatures
cordoba_ingles Seite 152 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Think ahead when driving
A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating. If you think ahead when driving,
you will need to brake less and thus accelerate less. Wherever possible, let
the vehicle roll slowly to a stop, for instance when you can see that the next
traffic lights are red.
Regular servicing
By taking your car to an Authorised Service Centre for regular servicing you
can establish a basis for good fuel economy before you start driving. A well-
serviced engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel efficiency as well as
maximum reliability and an enhanced resale value.
A badly serviced engine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.
Check the oil level every time you fill the tank page 174. Oil consumption
depends to a great extent on the engine load and engine speed. Depending
on your personal driving style, oil consumption can be up to 1 litre per 1,000
km.
Avoid short journeys
The engine and catalytic conv
temperature in order to minim
Directly after a cold start, the
100 km. This figure then drop
kilometre. The engine only rea
kilometres, when fuel consum
therefore avoid short journeys
The ambient temperature has
The illustration shows the diff
distance at both +20 C and -1
than in summer.
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 153
Safety Fir Technical Data
ain products may produce noxious vapours; l ventilated areas.
e, engine oil, nail varnish remover or other ic and highly flammable. There is a fire / explo-
hicle, or carry out any maintenance, switch off rake firmly and remove the key from the igni-
, mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is dry.
e for cleaning purposes. This could damage the
hicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust with plenty of
nvironment products, try to select ones which are not
should not be disposed of with ordinary house-
osal information on the package.
cordoba_ingles Seite 153 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle
General notes
Regular washing and care help maintain the value of your
vehicle.
Regular care
Regular and expert care helps to maintain the value of the vehicle. This may
also be one of the requirements for acknowledging warranty claims in the
event of corrosion or paint defects.
The best way to protect the car against environmental contaminants is to
wash and wax it frequently. The longer substances such as insects, bird drop-
pings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt
and other aggressive materials remain on the vehicle, the more damage they
do to the paintwork. High temperatures (for instance in strong sunlight)
further intensify the corrosive effect.
After the period when salt is put on the roads it is important to have the
underside of the vehicle washed thoroughly.
Car care products
Car care products are available from your Authorised Service Centre. Keep the
product instructions until you have used up the product.
WARNING
Car care products can be toxic. For this, they must always be kept closed in their original container. Keep out of children's reach. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.
Always read and observe the instructions and warnings on the package before using car care products. Improper use could damage your health or
your vehicle. The use of cert these should be used in wel
Never use fuel, turpentin volatile fluids. These are tox sion risk.
Before you wash your ve the engine, apply the handb tion.
Caution Never attempt to remove dirt
Never use a dry cloth or spong
paintwork or glass on your ve
water.
For the sake of the e When purchasing car care
harmful to the environment.
Left over car care products
hold waste. Observe the disp
WARNING (continued)
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle154
anels etc. last using a different sponge or
ughly with water.
ehicle gently using a chamois leather.
er seals and the surfaces they touch with
freezing. Apply silicone spray to the
en braking directly after washing the
the brakes by applying the brakes care-
age 143, Braking effect and braking
be switched off before the vehicle is washed.
rms from cuts on sharp metal edges when inside of the wheel housings etc. Risk of
the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk
irt, mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is
onge for cleaning purposes. This could scratch
r vehicle.
d weather: if the vehicle is rinsed with a hose,
e lock cylinders or the gaps around the doors,
cordoba_ingles Seite 154 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Care of the vehicle exterior
Automatic car washes
The paint is so durable that the car can normally be washed without problems
in an automatic car wash. However, the effect on the paint depends to a large
extent on the design of the car wash, the brushes used, the filtering of the
wash water and the type of detergents and wax solutions used, etc.
After the car has been washed, the brakes could respond later than normal
as the brake discs and brake pads will be wet, or even frozen in winter. You
must dry the brakes by applying the brakes carefully several times
page 143, Braking effect and braking distance.
WARNING
Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk of accident.
Washing by hand
Washing the vehicle
First soften the dirt with plenty of water and rinse off.
Clean the vehicle with a soft sponge, a glove or a brush. Start on
the roof and work your way down. Use only light pressure.
Rinse the sponge or glove as much as possible.
Special car shampoo should only be used for very stubborn dirt.
Clean the wheels, sill p
glove.
Rinse the vehicle thoro
Dry the surface of the v
If it is cold, dry the rubb
a cloth to prevent them
rubber seals.
After cleaning the vehicle
If possible, avoid sudd
vehicle. You must dry
fully several times p
distance.
WARNING
The ignition must always
Protect your hands and a cleaning the underbody, the injury.
Moisture, ice and salt on of accident.
Caution Never attempt to remove d
dry. Never use a dry cloth or sp
the paintwork or glass on you
Washing the vehicle in col
do not direct the water into th
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 155
Safety Fir Technical Data
concentrated jet or cylindrical jet (rotating ing distances and short cleaning times, visible cur to the tyres. This may be an accident risk.
the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk
an 60 C. This could damage the car.
hicle, maintain a sufficient distance from sensi-
xible hoses, plastic, sound proofing, etc. This is
pers painted in the same colour as the vehicle.
surface, the greater the wear on the material.
s the paintwork.
r car if water does not form small drops and run
lean.
ilable from your Authorised Service Centre.
rotects the paintwork from environmental
t is also effective in protecting against minor
regularly in the car wash, it is advisable to
of hard wax at least twice a year.
cordoba_ingles Seite 155 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
luggage compartment, or bonnet. This could cause them to freeze. Otherwise
there is a risk of malfunction.
For the sake of the environment In the interests of environmental protection, the car should be washed only
in specially provided wash bays. This prevents toxic, oil-laden waste water
entering the sewerage system. In some districts, washing vehicles anywhere
else may be prohibited.
Note Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Washing the car with a high pressure cleaner
Be particularly careful when using a high pressure cleaner!
Always observe the instructions for the high-pressure cleaner,
particularly those concerning the pressure and the spraying distance.
Increase the spraying distance for soft materials and painted
bumpers.
Do not use a high pressure cleaner to remove ice or snow from
windows page 156.
Never use concentrated jet nozzles or so-called dirt blasters
.
If possible, avoid sudden braking directly after washing the
vehicle. You must dry the brakes by applying the brakes care-
fully several times page 143.
WARNING
Never wash tyres with a nozzle). Even at large spray and invisible damage can oc
Moisture, ice and salt on of accident.
Caution Do not use water hotter th
To avoid damage to the ve
tive materials for example: fle
especially important for bum
The closer the nozzle is to the
Waxing the car
Regular waxing protect
You need to apply wax to you
off the paintwork when it is c
Good quality hard wax is ava
A good coat of wax helps to p
contaminants page 153. I
scratches.
Even if a wax solution is used
protect the paint with a coat
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle156
exterior mirrors
ith commercially available, alcohol based
clean chamois leather or a lint-free cloth.
ove snow from the windows and mirrors.
eather to dry the windows. Chamois leathers
ted surfaces are not suitable for use on
ith wax deposits which would smear the
y to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper, push
t move it to and fro.
ne remover to clean off rubber, oil, grease and
ved with a special cleaner which is available
Centre. Wax deposits on the windscreen could
er. A window cleanser specifically for removing
ring if added to the windscreen washer fluid.
ll not remove wax deposits.
ter to remove snow and ice from windows and
glass to crack!
cordoba_ingles Seite 156 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Polishing the paintwork
Polishing brings back gloss to the paintwork.
Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss cannot
be brought back by applying wax. Polish can be obtained from your Author-
ised Service Centre.
The car must be waxed after polishing if the polish used does not contain wax
compounds to seal the paint page 155, Waxing the car.
Caution To prevent damage to the paintwork:
Do not use polishes and hard wax on painted parts with a matt finish or
on plastic parts.
Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or dusty environment.
Caring for plastic parts
Solvents will damage plastic parts.
If normal washing fails to clean plastic parts, clean them with special solvent- free plastic cleaning and care products.
Caution To prevent damage to the paintwork:
Do not use polishes and hard wax on painted parts with a matt finish or
on plastic parts.
Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or dusty environment.
Cleaning windows and
Cleaning the windows
Moisten the windows w
glass cleaner.
Dry the windows with a
Removing snow
Use a small brush to rem
Removing ice
Use a de-icer spray.
Use a clean cloth or chamois l
which have been used on pain
windows. They will be soiled w
windows.
If possible use a de-icing spra
it in one direction only. Do no
Use window cleaner or a silico
silicone deposits.
Wax deposits have to be remo
from your Authorised Service
cause the wiper blades to judd
wax will stop the blades judde
Grease removing cleansers wi
Caution Never use warm or hot wa
mirrors. This could cause the
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 157
Safety Fir Technical Data
can freeze up in winter.
ou should only use spray with lubricating and
th a damp cloth.
ith a soft, dry cloth.
ying results, use a specialist chrome cleaning ducts will remove stains and coatings from the
surfaces:
re product on chrome.
ome parts in a sandy or dusty environment.
ularly using a separate sponge.
remove brake dust. Any damage to the paint on
red before the metal starts to rust.
cordoba_ingles Seite 157 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of the
window. To prevent damage, do not put stickers over the heating elements on
the inside of the window.
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
Clean wiper blades are essential for clear vision.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen
wiper blades.
2. Use window cleanser to clean the windscreen wiper blades. Use
a sponge or a cloth to remove stubborn stains.
Care of rubber seals
If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not freeze so
quickly.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the rubber seals.
2. Apply a specialist care product to the rubber seals.
The weather strips on the doors, windows, bonnet and rear lid will remain
pliable and last longer if they are treated with a suitable care product (for
example silicone spray).
Caring for rubber seals will also prevent premature ageing and leaks. The
doors will be easier to open. If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not
freeze so quickly in winter.
Door lock cylinders
The door lock cylinders
To de-ice the lock cylinders y
anti-corrosive properties.
Cleaning chrome parts
1. Clean chrome parts wi
2. Polish chrome parts w
If this does not provide satisf
product. Chrome cleaning pro
surface.
Caution To prevent scratching chrome
Never use an abrasive ca
Do not clean or polish chr
Steel wheels
Clean steel wheels reg
Use an industrial cleanser to
steel wheels should be repai
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle158
ylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances ible and invisible damage can occur to the t risk.
the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk sudden braking immediately after washing he brakes by applying the brakes carefully Braking effect and braking distance.
icle is coated to protect it from corro-
e damaged when driving. We recommend that
he body and on the running gear should be
essary, before and after the winter season.
rk and additional anti-corrosion work is carried
e Centre.
ti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, t shields on the exhaust system. The heat of gine could cause them to ignite! This is a fire
cordoba_ingles Seite 158 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
WARNING
Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the tyres. This may be an accident risk.
Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk of accident. If possible, avoid sudden braking immediately after washing the vehicle. You must dry the brakes by applying the brakes carefully several times page 143, Braking effect and braking distance.
Cleaning alloy wheels
Every two weeks
Wash salt and brake dust from alloy wheels.
Use an acid free detergent to clean the wheels.
Every three months
Apply a hard wax compound to the wheels.
Alloy wheels require regular attention to preserve their appearance. It is
important to remove road salt and brake dust by washing the wheels at
regular intervals, otherwise the finish will be impaired.
Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy wheels.
Car polish or other abrasive agents should not be used. If the protective
coating is damaged, e.g. by stone impact, the damaged area should be
repaired immediately.
WARNING
Never wash tyres with a c and short cleaning times, vis tyres. This may be an acciden
Moisture, ice and salt on of accident. If possible, avoid the vehicle. You must dry t several times page 143,
Underbody sealant
The underside of the veh
sion and damage.
The protective coating could b
the protective coating under t
checked, and reinstated if nec
We recommend that repair wo
out by your Authorised Servic
WARNING
Do not apply underseal or an catalytic converter or the hea the exhaust system or the en hazard.
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 159
Safety Fir Technical Data
the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk d sudden braking immediately after washing
fan. It is temperature-controlled and could en the key is removed from the ignition!
nvironment could be removed when the engine is washed.
leaned in an oil separator. For this reason,
rried out only by a qualified workshop or a suit-
e interior
and the dash panel
th to clean plastic parts and the dash
satisfactory results, use a special
aning product.
nd surface of the airbag module with cleansers ts cause the surface to become porous. If the g plastic parts can cause substantial injuries.
cordoba_ingles Seite 159 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Cleaning the engine compartment
Take special care when cleaning the engine compartment.
Anti-corrosion treatment
The engine compartment and the surface of the power unit are given anti-
corrosion treatment at the factory.
Good corrosion protection is particularly important in winter when the car is
frequently driven on salted roads. To prevent the salt corroding the vehicle,
the entire engine compartment should be thoroughly cleaned before and
after the salting period.
Your Authorised Service Centre is able to provide the correct cleaning and
preserving products and has the necessary equipment. For this reason, we
recommend having this work performed by them.
The anti-corrosion protection is usually removed if the engine compartment
is cleaned with grease removing solutions, or if you have the engine cleaned.
If this job is carried out, you should ensure that all surfaces, seams, joints and
components in the engine compartment are given anti-corrosion treatment
afterwards.
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 169
Switch off the engine, apply the parking brake firmly and always remove the key from the ignition before you open the bonnet.
Allow the engine to cool before you clean the engine compartment.
Do not clean the underside of vehicle, wheel arches without protecting your hands and arms. You may cut yourself on sharp-edged metal parts. Failure to comply could result in injury.
Moisture, ice and salt on of accident. If possible, avoi the vehicle.
Never touch the radiator start automatically, even wh
For the sake of the e Fuel, grease and oil deposits
The polluted water must be c
engine washing should be ca
able filling station.
Care of the vehicl
Cleaning plastic parts
Use a clean, damp clo
panel.
If this does not provide
solvent-free plastic cle
WARNING
Never clean the dash panel a containing solvents. Solven airbag inflates, disintegratin
WARNING (continued)
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle160
be removed using a mild soap solution
ablespoons diluted in one litre of water)
k through the leather or soak into the
ft, dry cloth.
reated regularly (about twice a year) with
roduct, which is available from your
tre.
ery sparingly.
ft, dry cloth.
to preserve the special qualities of leather, as
the natural properties of the specially selected
leather has a certain sensitivity to grease and
required in everyday use and when looking
seams can scratch and damage the surface. If
the sun for long periods, the leather should be
ght to prevent it from fading. However, slight
ity natural leather are normal.
olish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar
cordoba_ingles Seite 160 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Caution Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cleaning wooden trim*
Clean the wooden trim with a clean cloth moistened with water.
If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a gentle soap
solution.
Caution Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cleaning cloth seat covers and fabric trim
Cloth seat covers and fabric trim on the doors, headlining etc. can be cleaned
with a special interior cleanser or with dry foam and a soft brush.
Cleaning leather*
Normal cleaning
Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with water and wipe over the
leather surfaces.
Cleaning stubborn stains
More stubborn dirt can
(pure liquid soap; two t
and a cloth.
Do not let the water soa
seams.
Then wipe off with a so
Leather care
The leather should be t
a special leather-care p
Authorised Service Cen
Apply these products v
Then wipe off with a so
SEAT does everything possible
a natural product. Because of
hides employed, the finished
dirt, etc. so a degree of care is
after the leather.
Dust and grit in the pores and
the vehicle is left standing in
protected against direct sunli
colour variations in high-qual
Caution Do not use solvents, wax p
products on leather.
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 161
Safety Fir Technical Data
ts to dry completely before rolling them up.
could become damaged.
cordoba_ingles Seite 161 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
To avoid damage, stubborn stains should be removed by a qualified
workshop.
Cleaning seat belts
A dirty belt may stop the seat belt working properly.
Keep the seat belts clean and check all seat belts regularly.
Cleaning seat belts
Carefully pull the dirty seat belt right out and leave it out.
Clean the dirty seat belts with a gentle soap solution.
Allow the seat belt fabric to dry.
Do not roll up the seat belt until it is dry.
If large stains form on the belts the belt will not retract correctly into the auto-
matic belt retractor.
WARNING
Do not use chemical cleaning agents on the seat belts, as this can impair the strength of the webbing. Ensure that the belts do not come into contact with corrosive fluids.
Check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals. If you notice that the belt webbing, fittings, retractor mechanism or buckle of any of the belts is damaged, the belt must be replaced by a specialist workshop.
Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts must not be removed or modified in any way.
Caution After cleaning, allow seat bel
Otherwise the belt retractors
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications162
CE mark (European Union manufacturer
phone holders or drink holders, should never within the working range of, the airbags. If resulting injury if the airbag is triggered in an
ys be carried out according to our
the electronic components or software in the
ns. Due to the way the electronic components
s, other systems may be affected by the faults.
ty, lead to excessive wear of components, and
gistration documents.
es cannot be held liable for any damage
or work performed incorrectly.
be performed by an Authorised Service Centre
cordoba_ingles Seite 162 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications
Accessories and parts
Always consult an Authorised Service Centre before
purchasing accessories and parts.
Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safety.
Before purchasing accessories and parts, and before making technical
changes to your car, we recommend that you consult your Authorised Service
Centre.
SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide you with the latest information
about the use, legal requirements and recommendations from the manufac-
turer regarding accessories and parts.
We recommend you use only SEAT Approved Accessories and SEAT Approved Spare Parts . This way, SEAT can guarantee that the product in
question is suitable, reliable and safe. Authorised Service Centres have the
necessary experience and facilities to ensure that parts are installed correctly
and professionally.
Despite continuous observation of the market, SEAT is not able to assess the
reliability, safety and suitability of parts not approved by SEAT. For this reason
SEAT cannot assume responsibility for any non-genuine parts used, even if
these parts have been approved by an official testing agency or are covered
by an official approval certificate.
Any equipment subsequently installed which has a direct effect on the
vehicle and/or the way it is driven (e.g. cruise control system or electronically-
controlled suspension) must be approved by SEAT for use in your vehicle and
bear the e mark (the European Union's authorisation symbol).
If any additional electrical components are fitted which do not serve to
control the vehicle itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop or ventilator
fan, etc.), these must bear the
conformity declaration).
WARNING
Accessories, for example tele be fitted on the covers of, or they are, there is a danger of accident.
Modifications
Modifications must alwa
specifications.
Unauthorised modifications to
vehicle may cause malfunctio
are linked together in network
This can seriously impair safe
also invalidate your vehicle re
SEAT Authorised Service Centr
caused by modifications and/
For this reason, all work should
using genuine SEAT parts.
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications 163
Safety Fir Technical Data
Service Centre if you wish to use a mobile tele-
h a transmitting power in excess of 10 watts.
tion concerning the technical possibilities for
ay radios should be fitted only by a qualified
thorised Service Centre.
arily on driving. If you are distracted while cident.
ne mountings to the surfaces covering the ge of the airbags, danger of injury if the airbag
ones or two-way radios in the vehicle without agnetic radiation in the vehicle could exceed applies to external aerials that have not been
conditions could cause the electronics to
on causes of faults are:
installed,
ess of 10 watts.
instructions of your mobile telephone / two-way
cordoba_ingles Seite 163 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
WARNING
Incorrectly performed modifications or other work on your vehicle can lead to malfunctions and cause accidents.
Roof aerial*
The vehicle may be fitted with a collapsible roof aerial* with antitheft
system*, which can be folded backwards, when, for example, going through
an automatic carwash.
To fold
Unscrew the aerial rod, tilting it backwards into a horizontal position and then
screw in again.
To return to working position
Continue in the reverse order to that given in the previous instruction.
Mobile telephones and two-way radios
You will require an external aerial for mobile phones and two-
way radios.
SEAT has approved your vehicle for use with mobile telephones and two-way
radios providing the following conditions are observed:
The correct installation of an external aerial,
transmitting power of maximum 10 watts.
An external aerial is needed to give the equipment its optimal range.
First consult your Authorised
phone or a two-way radio wit
Here you will receive informa
retro-fitting this equipment.
Mobile telephones and two-w
workshop, for example an Au
WARNING
Always concentrate prim driving you could have an ac
Never attach the telepho airbag units or within the ran is triggered.
If you use mobile teleph an external aerial, electrom authorised limits. This also correctly installed.
Caution Failure to observe the above
malfunction. The most comm
no external aerial,
external aerial incorrectly
transmitting power in exc
Note Please observe the operating
radio.
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications164
Fig. 116 Attachment points for towing bracket
cordoba_ingles Seite 164 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Fitting a towing bracket*
It is possible to fit a towing bracket to the rear of the vehicle.
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications 165
Safety Fir Technical Data
se observe the instructions provided by the bracket.
ncorrectly installed, this could cause damage to
.
cordoba_ingles Seite 165 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the vehicle is purchased, this must be
completed according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer.
The attachment points for the towing bracket are underneath the vehicle.
The distance between the centre of the ball coupling and the ground should
never be lower than the measurement indicated when the vehicle is fully
loaded including the maximum resting weight.
Measurement for securing the towing bracket:
72 mm
420 mm (empty vehicle) to 350 mm (fully laden vehicle)
958 mm
413 mm
166 mm
Fitting a towing bracket
Towing a trailer places added strain on the vehicle. Therefore, before
fitting a towing bracket, please contact an Authorised Service Centre to check
whether your cooling system needs modification.
Observe the legal requirements in your country (e.g. the fitting of a sepa-
rate warning lamp).
Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear bumper must be removed and
reinstalled. The towing bracket securing bolts must be tightened using a
torque wrench, and an electrical socket must be used to connect to the
vehicle's electrical system. This requires specialist knowledge and tools.
The figures in the illustration show the dimensions and attachment points
which must be observed if you are retrofitting a towing bracket.
WARNING
Towing brackets should be fitted by specialists.
If the towing bracket is incorrectly installed, there is serious danger of an accident.
For your own safety, plea manufacturer of the towing
Caution If the electrical socket is i
the vehicle's electrical system
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels166
, without releasing the cap in the clock-
se the flap until it clicks into place. The
h an anti-loss attachment
he vehicle on the right.
operated correctly, it will switch itself off as
er attempt to fill beyond this point, as this will
el may leak out if ambient conditions are warm.
vehicle is given on a sticker on the inside of the
l can be found.
e and can cause serious burns and other inju-
y naked flame when filling the fuel tank of the nister, with fuel. This is an explosion hazard.
nts for the use of spare fuel canisters.
do not recommend carrying a spare fuel e canister could be damaged in an accident
ances, you have to carry a spare fuel canister, points:
l canister inside the vehicle or on it. An elec- ild up during filling, causing the fuel fumes to
explosive. Always place the canister on the
cordoba_ingles Seite 166 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Checking and refilling levels
Refuelling
The tank flap is released manually. The tank holds approxi-
mately 45 litres.
Unscrewing the tank cap
Lift the lid.
Grip the cap and then insert the key into the lock and rotate 180
to the left.
Unscrew the cap, turning it anti-clockwise.
Closing the tank cap
Screw the tank cap to the right, until the point of feeling a click.
Turn the key in the lock
wise direction 180.
Remove the key and clo
tank cap is secured wit
The tank flap is at the rear of t
If the automatic filler nozzle is
soon as the tank is full. Nev
fill the expansion chamber. Fu
The correct fuel grade for your
tank flap. Further notes on fue
WARNING
Fuel is highly inflammabl ries.
Never smoke or use an vehicle, or a spare fuel ca
Follow legal requireme
For safety reasons we canister in the vehicle. Th and leak.
If, in exceptional circumst please observe the following
Never fill the spare fue trostatic charge could bu ignite. This may be fatally ground to fill it.
Fig. 117 Tank flap open
Checking and refilling levels 167
Safety Fir Technical Data
ccording to their octane number, e. g. 91, 95,
ane number). You may use petrol with a higher
recommended for your engine. However, this
f fuel consumption and engine power.
d fuel would permanently impair the efficiency
ll throttle can damage the engine when using
ower than the correct grade for the engine.
nvironment el would seriously impair the efficiency of the
e the quality of the petrol.
ences running behaviour, performance and
this reason you should use good quality petrol
dditives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the
t deposits from building up in the engine.
itives is not available or engine problems occur,
e added during refuelling.
cordoba_ingles Seite 167 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of the canister as far as possible.
If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must be in contact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electro- static charge building up.
Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel vapours are explosive. Danger of death.
Caution Fuel spills should be removed from the paintwork immediately.
Never run the tank completely dry. An irregular fuel supply could cause
misfiring. As a result, unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
cause damage.
For the sake of the environment Do not try to put in more fuel after the automatic filler nozzle has switched off;
this may cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.
Petrol
Petrol types
The correct petrol types are listed on a sticker inside the fuel
tank flap.
Only unleaded petrol, corresponding to the standard DIN EN 228, may be
used for vehicles with catalytic converters (EN = European Norm).
Petrol types are categorised a
98 RON (RON = research oct
octane number than the one
has no advantage in terms o
Caution Even one tankfull of leade
of the catalytic converter.
High engine speed and fu
petrol with an octane rating l
For the sake of the e Just one tankfull of leaded fu
catalytic converter.
Petrol additives
Petrol additives improv
The quality of the petrol influ
service life of the engine. For
containing additives. These a
fuel system clean and preven
If good quality petrol with add
the required additives must b
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels168
l (biodiesel)
cle using biodiesel maybe somewhat reduced.
icle using biodiesel maybe slightly higher.
inter at temperatures down to approx. -10C.
low -10 C, we recommend using winter diesel
fuel system in vehicles which are not suitably
sel in your vehicle, please use only RME fuel
nt.
oes not meet the required standard, the fuel
peratures and a fuel biodiesel percentage of
in gas emission may occur during operation of
clogged when fuel is changed to biodiesel. For
at, about every 300 or 400 km, following a fuel
filter. Also. note the instructions in the inspec-
arked for more than about two weeks, we
k with biodiesel and driving about 50 km in
injection system.
cordoba_ingles Seite 168 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Diesel
Diesel*
Diesel fuel must correspond to DIN EN 590 (EN = European standard). It
must have a cetane number (CN) of at least 51. The cetane number indicates
the ignition quality of the diesel fuel.
Notes on filling with fuel page 166.
RME fuel*
Only those vehicles fitted with special equipment (number PR
2G0 for biodiesel use) may use biodiesel corresponding to
the standard DIN EN 14214.
The biodiesel fuel must comply with the DIN EN 14.214 (FAME) Standard.
Biodiesel is a methylester obtained from rapeseed oil.
DIN is a German abbreviation for Deutsches Institut fr Normug e.V.,
the German standards institute.
EN means European Norm.
FAME is the English abbreviation Fatty Acid Methyl Ester
If the date sticker of the vehicle includes the number PR 2G0 optional equip-
ment) this means that that vehicle has been prepared for biodiesel use.
Your Authorised Service Centre or automobile association will be able to
advise on where you can obtain RME biodiesel fuel.
Your Authorised Service Centre can also be consulted to know if the vehicle
has been prepared for biodiesel use.
Things to note about RME fue
The performance of a vehi
Fuel consumption of a veh
RME fuel can be used in w
At outside temperatures be
fuel.
Caution RME fuel can damage the
adjusted.
If you decide to use biodie
which is DIN E 14,214 complia
If you use biodiesel that d
filter could become clogged.
Note In case of low exterior tem
higher than 50%, an increase
the independent heating.
The fuel filter may become
this reason, we recommend th
change, also change the fuel
tion and maintenance plan.
If the vehicle is to remain p
recommend filling the fuel tan
order to avoid damage to the
Checking and refilling levels 169
Safety Fir Technical Data
gine compartment
working in the engine compartment
the engine compartment or on the
out cautiously.
n the engine or in the engine compart-
nd remove the key from the ignition.
neutral or the selector lever to position P.
cool down.
m the vehicle.
ge 171.
n the engine compartment unless you know
obs and have the correct tools! Have the work
rkshop if you are uncertain.
ables, e.g. coolant, engine oil, spark plugs and
ly developed. SEAT provides a constant flow of
Service Centres concerning modifications. For
at you have service fluids and consumables
rvice Centre. Please observe the relevant
e engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a
cordoba_ingles Seite 169 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Winter driving
Diesel can thicken in winter.
Winter-grade diesel
When using summer-grade diesel fuel, difficulties may be experienced at
sub-zero temperatures because the fuel thickens due to paraffin separation.
For this reason, winter-grade diesel fuel is available in some countries
during the cold months. It can be used at temperatures as low as -22 C.
In countries with different climatic conditions the diesel fuel sold generally
has different temperature characteristics. Check with an Authorised Service
Centre or filling stations in the country concerned regarding the type of diesel
fuels available.
Filter pre-heater
Your vehicle is fitted with a filter fuel pre-heater, making it well equipped for
operation in winter. This ensures that the fuel system remains operational to
approx. -24 C, provided you use winter-grade diesel which is safe to -15 C .
However, if the fuel has waxed to such an extent that the engine will not start
at temperatures of under -24 C, simply place the vehicle in a warm room for
a while.
Caution Do not mix fuel additives (thinners, or similar additives) with diesel fuel.
Working in the en
Safety instructions on
Any work carried out in
engine must be carried
Before starting any work o
ment:
1. Switch off the engine a
2. Apply the handbrake.
3. Move the gear stick to
4. Wait for the engine to
5. Keep children away fro
6. Raise the bonnet pa
You should not do any work i
exactly how to carry out the j
carried out by a qualified wo
All service fluids and consum
batteries, are being constant
information to the Authorised
this reason we recommend th
replaced by an Authorised Se
instructions page 162. Th
hazardous area .
Checking and refilling levels170
ormed when the engine is started or with the ditional, potentially fatal, safety risk from the ive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and n system. You should also observe the
cal wiring of the ignition system.
loose clothing and long hair do not get e parts. Danger of death. Before starting any e back and cover hair, and wear tight-fitting
about pressing the accelerator if a gear is matic or manual gearbox. The vehicle could
ake is applied. Danger of death.
ut on the fuel system or on electrical compo- ollowing safety notes in addition to the above
battery. The vehicle must be unlocked when e alarm will be triggered.
flames.
nguisher on hand.
service fluids, make absolutely certain that you
servoirs. Failure to observe this point will result
ngine damage!
cordoba_ingles Seite 170 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
WARNING
All work on the engine or in the engine compartment, e.g. checking and refilling fluids, involves the danger of injury and scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire.
Never open the bonnet if you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. Otherwise, there is a risk of sustaining burns. Wait until no more steam or coolant is emitted, then allow the engine to cool before carefully opening the bonnet.
Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
Apply the handbrake and move the gear stick to neutral or selector lever to position P.
Keep children away from the vehicle.
Never touch hot engine parts. This is a risk of burns.
Never spill liquids on a hot engine or on a hot exhaust gas system. This is a fire hazard.
Avoid causing short-circuits in the electrical system, particularly at the points where the jump leads are attached page 215. The battery could explode.
Never touch the radiator fan. It is temperature controlled and could start automatically, even when the engine has been switched off and the key removed from the ignition!
Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. If the coolant is hot, the cooling system will be pressurised!
Protect face, hands and arms by covering the cap with a large, thick cloth to protect against escaping coolant and steam.
Always make sure you have not left any objects, such as cleaning cloths and tools, in the engine compartment.
If you have to work underneath the vehicle, you must use suitable stands additionally to support the vehicle, risk of accident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for securing the vehicle and there is a risk of injury.
If any work has to be perf engine running, there is an ad rotating parts, such as the dr from the high-voltage ignitio following points:
Never touch the electri
Ensure that jewellery, trapped in rotating engin work remove jewellery, ti clothes.
Always think carefully engaged in either an auto move, even if the handbr
If work has to be carried o nents, you must observe the f warnings:
Always disconnect the this is done, otherwise th
Do not smoke.
Never work near naked
Always have a fire exti
Caution When changing or topping up
fill the fluids into the correct re
in serious malfunctions and e
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels 171
Safety Fir Technical Data
he release lever (arrow) and open the
y and secure it in fixture designed for this
f you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping nt.
, smoke or coolant is emitted from the bonnet, net.
ine compartment, always observe the safety
tly
y and replace it in its support.
cm let it fall so it is locked.
do not press downwards. Open it once more and
roperly, it could open while you are driving and w of the road. Risk of accident.
cordoba_ingles Seite 171 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
For the sake of the environment Service fluids leaks are harmful to the environment. For this reason you
should make regular checks on the ground underneath your vehicle. If you
find spots of oil or other fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a qualified
workshop.
Opening the bonnet
The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle.
Before opening the bonnet ensure that the windscreen wipers are in
rest position.
To release the bonnet, pull the lever under the dashboard
fig. 118 in the direction indicated (arrow). The bonnet will be
released by a spring action .
Lift the bonnet using t
bonnet.
Release the bonnet sta
in the bonnet.
WARNING
Hot coolant can scald!
Never open the bonnet i from the engine compartme
Wait until no more steam then carefully open the bon
When working in the eng warnings page 169
Closing the bonnet
Raise the bonnet sligh
Release the bonnet sta
At a height of about 30
If the bonnet does not close,
let it fall as before.
WARNING
If the bonnet is not closed p completely obscure your vie
Fig. 118 Detail of the footwell: The release lever for the bonnet is located in the driver side footwell. Arrester hook for bonnet
Checking and refilling levels172
rol and diesel engines, the oil can be used for
cordoba_ingles Seite 172 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
After closing the bonnet, always check that it is properly secured. The bonnet must be flush with the surrounding body panels.
If you notice that the bonnet latch is not secured when the vehicle is moving, stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet properly. Risk of accident.
Engine oil
Engine oil specifications
The engine used must conform to exact specifications.
Specifications
The engine comes with a special, high quality, multi grade oil that can be
used in all seasons of the year except for those regions affected by extreme
cold.
As the use of good quality oil is necessary for the correct operation and long
service life of the engine, when it becomes necessary to replenish or change
the oil, always use an oil that complies to the VW standards.
If it is not possible to find oil conforming to the VW standards then oil
conforming to the ACEA or API standards with an appropriate viscosity at
atmospheric temperature should be used instead. The use of this type of oil
may have some repercussions on the performance of the engine for example,
long starting time, increased consumption and a higher emission level.
If a top up is required then different oils may be mixed as long as they all
conform to the VW standards.
The specifications (VW standards) set out in the following page should
appear on the container of the service oil; the container will display together
the different standards for pet
both types of engines. WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels 173
Safety Fir Technical Data
s selected according to the diagram.
re falls outside the limits of the scale for a short
equired.
ents
d before 1-97
d before 1-97
d before 1-97
ents
any other type of oil for this type of engine other than
d before 1-97
d before 1-97
d before 1-97
cordoba_ingles Seite 173 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Oil properties
Viscosity
The viscosity class of the oil i
When the ambient temperatu
period, an oil change is not r
Petrol engines
Diesel engines
Fig. 119 Types of oil according to temperature
Denomination Specification Comm
A - synthetic oils VW 502 00/ VW 500 00 Date
B - mineral oils VW 501 01 Date
A/B - multigrade oils ACEA B2 or B3 or even API SH/SJ Date
Denomination Specification Comm
A - synthetic oils VW 505 01a)
a) Diesel engines with a system of pump-injector type injection should use onlyoil with the specification VW 505 01. Avoid using the VW 505 01 specification; This could lead to engine damage!
Date
B - mineral oils VW 505 00 Date
A/B - multigrade oils ACEA B2 or B3 or even API CD/CF Date
Checking and refilling levels174
level
ndicates the level of the oil.
, read and observe the warnings in
rking in the engine compartment on
even surface.
ne, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain
ge 171.
cloth and insert it again, pushing it in as
Fig. 120 Engine oil dipstick.
cordoba_ingles Seite 174 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Mono-grade oil
Single grade oils are generally not suitable for all year round use, due to
ranges of viscosity5).
These oils are only useful in a climate that is constantly very cold or very
warm.
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration
caused by these additives is not covered by the guarantee.
Note Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the
corresponding VW specifications and keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the
correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if needed.
Checking the engine oil
The engine oil dipstick i
Before opening the bonnet
Safety instructions on wo
page 169 .
Park the vehicle on an
After stopping the engi
back into the sump.
Raise the bonnet pa
Pull out the dipstick.
Wipe the dipstick with a
far as it will go.
5) Viscosity: Ability to flow
Checking and refilling levels 175
Safety Fir Technical Data
mall quantities of oil.
t, read and observe the warnings in
orking in the engine compartment on
iller opening fig. 121.
ounts, using the correct oil.
th engine oil, you should top-up using
a while and check the oil level before
l is in area , carefully close the cap.
pening is shown in the corresponding engine
e 224.
Fig. 121 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap
AB
cordoba_ingles Seite 175 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Pull the dipstick out again and check the oil level page 174,
fig. 120.
Replace the dipstick, pushing it in as far as it will go.
The position of the dipstick is shown in the corresponding engine compart-
ment diagram page 224.
If the oil level is in area page 174, fig. 120 , do not top up with oil.
If the oil level is in area , you may top up with oil (approx. 0.5 l).
If the oil level is in area , you must top up with oil (approx. 1.0 l).
It is normal for the engine to consume a certain amount of oil. Consumption
can be up to 1.0 litres per 1,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level must
be checked at regular intervals, preferably when filling the tank and before a
journey.
When the engine is working hard, for instance during sustained high-speed
motorway cruising in summer, when towing a trailer or climbing on mountain
passes, the oil level should preferably be kept within area and not above
this.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 169
Caution If the oil level is above the area do not start the engine. This could result
in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact an Authorised
Service Centre.
Topping up engine oil
Top up gradually with s
Before opening the bonne
Safety instructions on w
page 169 .
Unscrew cap from oil f
Top-up oil in small am
To avoid over-filling wi
small quantities, wait
adding any more oil.
As soon as the oil leve
The position of the oil filler o
compartment diagram pag
AA
AB
AC
AA
AA
Checking and refilling levels176
et, read and observe the warnings tions on working in the engine
l down. Hot oil may cause burn injuries.
oid injuries caused by splashes of oil.
ain plug with your fingers, keep your arm hori- m running down your arm.
ly if it comes into contact with engine oil.
sed oil must be stored in a safe place out of s disposed of.
ith engine oil. This could result in engine
by the use of such additives would not be
ty.
vironment roblems, the necessary special tools and
, we recommend that you have the engine oil
orised Service Centre.
s or into the ground.
hen draining the used oil. It has the be large
oil
cordoba_ingles Seite 176 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Engine oil specification page 172.
WARNING
Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil comes into contact with hot engine components when topping up.
Caution If the oil level is above the area do not start the engine. This could result
in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact a qualified work-
shop.
For the sake of the environment The oil level must never be above area . Otherwise oil can be drawn in
through the crankcase breather and escape into the atmosphere via the
exhaust system.
Changing engine oil
The engine oil must be changed at the intervals given in the
service schedule.
We recommend that you have the engine oil changed by an Authorised
Service Centre.
The two different oil change intervals are shown in the Booklet Service
schedule.
WARNING
Only change the oil yourself if you have the specialist knowledge required!
Before opening the bonn page 169, Safety instruc compartment.
Wait for the engine to coo
Wear eye protection to av
When removing the oil dr zontal to help prevent oil fro
Wash your skin thorough
Engine oil is poisonous! U the reach of children until it i
Caution No additives should be used w
damage. Any damage caused
covered by the factory warran
For the sake of the en Because of the disposal p
specialist knowledge required
and filter changed by an Auth
Never pour oil down drain
Use a suitable container w
enough to hold all the engine
AA
AA
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels 177
Safety Fir Technical Data
considerably inferior corrosion protection. The
ling system can lead to a loss of coolant,
e engine.
+ (purple) can be mixed with the additive G 12
(red colour) with G 11.
evel and topping up
l is important for fault-free func-
oling system.
t, read and observe the warnings in
orking in the engine compartment on
Fig. 122 In the engine compartment: Coolant expansion tank cap
cordoba_ingles Seite 177 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Coolant
Coolant specifications
Coolant is a mixture of water and at least 40% coolant addi-
tive.
The cooling system must be filled with a mixture of water and at least 40 % of
our coolant additive G 12+ or an additive with the specification TT-VW 774 F
(it is dyed purple). This mixture gives the necessary frost protection down to
-25 C and protects the alloy parts of the cooling system against corrosion. It
also prevents scaling and raises the boiling point of the coolant.
The concentration of coolant must always be at least 40% - even if frost
protection is not required.
If greater frost protection is required in very cold climates, the proportion of
the antifreeze additive G 12+ can be increased. However, the percentage of
coolant additives should not exceed 60%, as this would reduce the frost
protection. It would also reduce the cooling effect. A mixture with 60%
coolant additive will give frost protection to approx. -40 C.
WARNING
The coolant additive is toxic. This represents a toxic danger. Always keep the coolant additive in the original container which should be stored out of the reach of children. The same applies to coolant which you have drained off.
The coolant additive G 12+ must be added in sufficient quantities to provide anti-freeze protection at the coldest ambient temperatures that can be expected. At extremely cold ambient temperatures, the coolant could freeze, causing the vehicle to breakdown. As the heater would also not work in this situation, there is a risk of suffering exposure!
Caution Other additives may give
resulting corrosion in the coo
causing serious damage to th
The coolant additive G 12
(red) or G 11. Never mix G12
Checking the coolant l
The correct coolant leve
tioning of the engine co
Before opening the bonne
Safety instructions on w
page 169 .
Checking and refilling levels178
ed purple) may be mixed with G 12 (dyed red)
ngine compartment or on the engine must be
ine compartment, always observe the safety
or hot, the cooling system is pressurised! Do xpansion tank when the engine is hot. This is
ditives the colour of G 12 will change to brown.
the coolant changed immediately. Failure to do
e!
lost, wait for the engine to cool down before
voids damaging the engine. Large coolant
ks in the cooling system. See a specialised
ve the cooling system checked. Otherwise,
ge.
cordoba_ingles Seite 178 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Opening the coolant expansion tank
Switch off the engine and allow it to cool.
To prevent scalding, cover the cap on the expansion tank with a
thick cloth and carefully unscrew the cap .
Checking coolant level
Look into the open coolant expansion tank and read off the
coolant level.
If the level is underneath the MIN mark, top up with coolant.
Topping up coolant
Only use new coolant.
Do not fill above the MAX mark.
Closing the coolant expansion tank
Screw the cap on again tightly.
The position of the coolant expansion tank is shown in the corresponding
engine compartment diagram page 224.
Make sure that the coolant meets the required specifications page 177.
Do not use a different type of additive if coolant additive G 12+ is not avail-
able. In this case use only water and bring the coolant concentration back up
to the correct level as soon as possible by putting in the specified additive
page 177.
Always top up with new coolant.
Do not fill above the MAX mark. Otherwise the excess coolant will be forced
out of the cooling system when the engine is hot.
The coolant additive G 12+ (dy
and also with G 11.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the e carried out cautiously.
When working in the eng warnings page 169
When the engine is warm not unscrew the cap on the e a burn injury risk.
Caution When mixed with other ad
If this occurs you should have
so will result in engine damag
If a lot of coolant has been
putting in cold coolant. This a
losses are an indication of lea
workshop immediately and ha
there is a risk of engine dama
Checking and refilling levels 179
Safety Fir Technical Data
engine compartment or on the engine must be
ine compartment, always observe the safety
eze or other additives into the windscreen
dscreen cleansing products diluted as per
washer fluids or soap solutions, the tiny aper-
les could become blocked.
cordoba_ingles Seite 179 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades
Topping up washer fluid
The water for cleaning the windscreen should always be
mixed with washer fluid.
The windscreen washer and the headlight washing system are supplied with
fluid from the windscreen washer fluid container in the engine compartment.
The container holds approx. 2 litres; in vehicles with headlamp washers* it
holds approx. 4.5 litres.
The reservoir is located on the right-hand side of the engine compartment.
Plain water is not enough to clean the windscreen and headlights. We recom-
mend that you always add a product to the windscreen washer fluid.
Approved windscreen cleaning products exist on the market with high deter-
gent and anti-freeze properties, these may be added all-year-round. Please
follow the dilution instructions on the packaging.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the carried out cautiously.
When working in the eng warnings page 169
Caution Never put radiator anti-fre
washer fluid.
Always use approved win
instructions. If you use other
tures in the fan-shaped nozz
Fig. 123 In the engine compartment: Cap of windscreen washer fluid reservoir.
Checking and refilling levels180
e faces down when fitting a blade with
de.
they should be replaced if they are damaged,
esired results, the setting angle of the wind-
correct. They should be checked by a qualified
essary.
good visibility through all windows!
er blades and all windows regularly.
be changed once or twice a year.
en wipers could scratch the windscreen.
h remover, paint thinner or similar products to
damage the windscreen wiper blades.
n wiper or windscreen wiper arm manually. This
ved to the service position only when the
cordoba_ingles Seite 180 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Changing windscreen wiper blades
If the windscreen wiper blades are in perfect condition, you
will benefit from an improved visibility. Damaged wiper
blades should be replaced immediately.
Removing the wiper blade
Lift wiper arm and place the blade at right angles to the wiper
arm.
Press the retaining spring in direction fig. 124.
Unhook wiper blade in direction of arrow fig. 124 and
remove it from the wiper arm in the opposite direction.
Fitting the wiper blade
Fit the safety spring on the wiper arm until it clicks into place.
Make sure that the blad
integrated deflector bla
If the windscreen wipers rub,
or cleaned if they are soiled.
If this does not produce the d
screen wiper arms might be in
workshop and corrected if nec
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have
Clean the windscreen wip
The wiper blades should
Caution Damaged or dirty windscre
Never use fuel, nail varnis
clean the windows. This could
Never move the windscree
could cause damage.
Note The wiper arms can be mo
bonnet is properly closed.
Fig. 124 Change wind- screen wiper blade
AA
AB
Checking and refilling levels 181
Safety Fir Technical Data
, it should be replaced if it is damaged, or
o a qualified workshop.
e good visibility through all windows!
per blades and all windows regularly.
be changed once or twice a year.
w wiper could scratch the rear window.
h remover, paint thinner or similar products to
en wiper by hand. This could cause damage.
cordoba_ingles Seite 181 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Changing the rear wiper blade
A good rear wiper blade is essential for clear rear vision.
Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately.
Removing the wiper blade
Lift wiper arm and place the blade at right angles to the wiper
arm.
Press the retaining spring in direction fig. 125.
Unhook wiper blade in direction of arrow and remove it from
the wiper arm in the opposite direction.
Fitting the wiper blade
Fit the safety spring on the wiper arm until it clicks into place.
Check the condition of the wiper blade regularly. Change as required.
If the windscreen wiper rubs cleaned if it is soiled.
If this is not sufficient, refer t
WARNING
Do not drive unless you hav
Clean the windscreen wi
The wiper blades should
Caution A damaged or dirty windo
Never use fuel, nail varnis
clean the window.
Never move the windscreFig. 125 Changing the rear window wiper blade
AA
AB
Checking and refilling levels182
n noticeably in a short time, or drops below the
ak in the brake system. A display on the instru-
e brake fluid level is too low page 60.
check the brake fluid level, read and observe
d
renewed every two years.
the brake fluid changed by an Authorised
lease read and follow the warnings in
g in the engine compartment on page 169 in
rtment.
In the course of time, it will absorb water from
ntent in the brake fluid is too high, the brake
o considerably reduces the boiling point of the
rakes may then cause a vapour lock which
t.
must be renewed every two years.
use brake fluid compliant with the US standard
end the use of Genuine SEAT brake fluid.
brake fluid impairs the braking effect.
cordoba_ingles Seite 182 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Brake fluid
Checking the brake fluid level
The brake fluid is checked at the intervals given in the service
schedule.
Read off the fluid level at the transparent brake fluid reservoir. It
should always be between the MIN and MAX marks.
The position of the coolant expansion tank is shown in the corresponding
engine compartment diagram page 224. The brake fluid reservoir has a
black and yellow cap.
The brake fluid level drops slightly when the vehicle is being used as the
brake pads are automatically adjusted as they wear.
However, if the level goes dow
MIN mark, there may be a le
ment panel will warn you if th
WARNING
Before opening the bonnet to the warnings page 169.
Changing the brake flui
The brake fluid must be
We recommend that you have
Service Centre.
Before opening the bonnet, p
Safety instructions on workin
Working in the engine compa
Brake fluid absorbs moisture.
the ambient air. If the water co
system could corrode. This als
brake fluid. Heavy use of the b
could impair the braking effec
For this reason the brake fluid
It important that you use only
FMVSS 116 DOT 4. We recomm
WARNING
Brake fluid is poisonous. Old
Fig. 126 In the engine compartment: Brake fluid reservoir cover
Checking and refilling levels 183
Safety Fir Technical Data
the battery
er of injury and chemical burns as well as the working on the battery and the electrical
tect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid and
sive and caustic. Wear protective gloves and e batteries. This could spill acid through the m eyes immediately for several minutes with cal care immediately. Neutralize any acid hing with a soapy solution, and rinse off with allowed by mistake, consult a doctor immedi-
ts and smoking are prohibited. When handling ent, avoid causing sparks and electrostatic
protection
id is very corrosive and caustic. Wear protec-
s and eye protection!
rks, naked lights and smoking are prohibited!
xplosive mixture of gases is given off when the
under charge.
dren away from acid and batteries!
cordoba_ingles Seite 183 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and observe the warnings page 169.
Brake fluid should be stored in the closed original container in a safe place out of reach of children. This represents a toxic danger.
Have the brake fluid changed every two years at the latest. Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for too long. This would seriously affect the efficiency of the brakes and the safety of the vehicle. This may be an accident risk.
Caution Brake fluid could damage the paintwork. Wipe off any brake fluid from the
paintwork immediately.
For the sake of the environment Brake fluid must be drained and disposed of in the proper manner observing
environmental regulations.
Battery
Warnings on handling
WARNING
Always be aware of the dang risk of accident or fire when system:
Wear eye protection. Pro particles containing lead.
Battery acid is very corro eye protection. Do not tilt th vents. Rinse battery acid fro clear water. Then seek medi splashes on the skin or clot plenty of water. If acid is sw ately.
Fires, sparks, naked ligh cables and electrical equipm
WARNING (continued)
Wear eye
Battery ac
tive glove
Fires, spa
A highly e
battery is
Keep chil
Checking and refilling levels184
ng in cold conditions for a long period, protect
ezes it will be damaged.
e level
uld be checked regularly in high-
countries and in older batteries.
en the battery cover at the front in
working in the engine compartment on
rnings on handling the battery on
y in the magic eye on the top of the
n the window, tap the window gently until
hown in the corresponding engine compart-
e) on the top of the battery changes colour,
l and electrolyte level of the battery.
olourless or bright yellow, the electrolyte level
the battery checked by a qualified workshop.
re used by the workshops for diagnostic
cordoba_ingles Seite 184 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
charge. Never short the battery terminals. High-energy sparks can cause injury.
A highly explosive mixture of gases is given off when the battery is under charge. The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room only.
Keep children away from acid and batteries.
Before working on the electrical system, you must switch off the engine, the ignition and all consumers. The minus cable on the battery must be disconnected. When a light bulb is changed, you need only switch off the light.
Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlocking the vehicle before you disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered.
When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle electrical system, disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable.
Switch off all electrical consumers before reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. Never reverse the polarity of the connections. This could cause an electrical fire.
Never charge a frozen battery, or one which has thawed. This could result in explosions and chemical burns. Always replace a battery which has frozen. A flat battery can freeze at temperatures around 0 C.
Ensure that the vent hose is always connected to the battery.
Never use a defective battery. This may be fatally explosive. Replace a damaged battery immediately.
Caution Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the engine
is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic compo-
nents.
Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight over a long period of time, as
the intense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing.
If the vehicle is left standi
the battery from frost. If it fre
Checking the electrolyt
The electrolyte level sho
mileage vehicles, in hot
Open the bonnet and op
Safety instructions on
page 169 in Wa
page 183.
Check the colour displa
battery.
If there are air bubbles i
they disperse.
The position of the battery is s
ment diagram page 224.
The round window (magic ey
depending on the charge leve
If the colour in the window is c of the battery is too low. Have
The colours green and black a
purposes.
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels 185
Safety Fir Technical Data
nvironment nces such as sulphuric acid and lead. They
iately and must not be disposed of with ordinary
r a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very
possible at a right angle to the kerb.
el off the tyres.
arly for damage (cuts, cracks or blisters,
ign objects embedded in the treads.
move them to indicate the direction of
you will be able to install them correctly
.
eels and/or tyres should be stored in a
ly dark location.
l position if they are not fitted on wheel
cordoba_ingles Seite 185 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Charging and changing the vehicle battery
The battery is maintenance-free and is checked during the
inspection service. All work on the vehicle battery requires
specialist knowledge.
If you often drive short distances or if the vehicle is not driven for long
periods, the battery should be checked by a qualified workshop between the
scheduled services.
If the battery has discharged and you have problems starting the vehicle, the
battery might be damaged. If this happens, we recommend you have the
vehicle battery checked by an Authorised Service Centre where it will be re-
charged or replaced.
Charging the battery
The vehicle battery should be charged by a qualified workshop only, as
batteries using special technology have been installed and they must be
charged in a controlled environment.
Replacing a vehicle battery
The battery has been developed to suit the conditions of their location and
has special safety features.
Genuine SEAT batteries fulfil the maintenance, performance and safety spec-
ifications of your vehicle.
WARNING
We recommend you use only maintenance-free or cycle free leak-proof batteries which comply with the standards T 825 06 and VW 7 50 73. This standard applies as of 2001.
Before starting any work on the batteries, you must read and observe the warnings in Warnings on handling the battery on page 183.
For the sake of the e Batteries contain toxic substa
must be disposed of appropr
household waste.
Wheels
General notes
Avoiding damage
If you have to drive ove
slowly and as near as
Keep grease, oil and fu
Inspect the tyres regul
etc.). Remove any fore
Storing tyres
Mark tyres when you re
rotation. This ensures
when you replace them
When removed, the wh
cool, dry and preferab
Store tyres in a vertica
rims.
Checking and refilling levels186
e can be seen on the sticker on the
nflation pressure from the sticker. The
tyres. For Winter tyres, you must add 0.2
on the sticker.
ld only be checked when the tyres are
pressures of warm tyres must not be
to the load you are carrying.
ecially important at high speeds. The pressure
t least once a month and before starting a
pressure is too low, causing an accident!
eds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes too hot, and this can cause tread separation serve the recommended tyre pressures.
low or too high, the tyres will wear prema- t handle well. Risk of accident!
vironment se fuel consumption.
cordoba_ingles Seite 186 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
New tyres
New tyres have to be run in page 143.
The tread depth of new tyres may vary, according to the type and make of tyre
and the tread pattern.
Concealed damage
Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily visible. If you notice unusual
vibrations or the car pulling to one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres
is damaged. The tyres should be checked immediately by an Authorised
Service Centre.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with
directional tread. Always observe the direction of rotation indicated when
fitting the wheel. This guarantees optimum grip and helps to avoid aqua-
planing, excessive noise and wear.
WARNING
New tyres do not have maximum grip in the first 500 km. Drive particu- larly carefully to avoid risk of accident.
Never drive with damaged tyres. This may be an accident risk.
If you notice unusual vibration or if the vehicle pulls to one side when driving, stop the vehicle immediately and check the tyres for damage.
Checking tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressur
inside of the tank flap.
1. Read the required tyre i
values refer to Summer
bar to the values given
2. The tyre pressures shou
cold. The slightly raised
reduced.
3. Adjust the tyre pressure
Tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressure is esp
should therefore be checked a
journey.
WARNING
A tyre can easily burst if the
At continuously high spe more. In this way it becomes and tyre blow-out. Always ob
If the tyre pressure is too turely and the vehicle will no
For the sake of the en Under-inflated tyres will increa
Checking and refilling levels 187
Safety Fir Technical Data
icle have 1.6 mm high tread wear
g across the tread. Depending on the make,
em evenly spaced around the tyre. Markings on
the letters TWI or other symbols) indicate the
dicators. The minimum tread depth required by
he tread grooves next to the tread wear indica-
laced. Different figures may apply in export
premature wear and could cause tyre blow-out.
ure should be checked at least once per month
ation and hard braking all increase tyre wear.
siderably more than the rear ones it is advisable
own fig. 128. All the tyres will then last for
re balanced. However, various factors encoun-
use them to become unbalanced, which results
e rebalanced, as they otherwise cause excessive
and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced
uses excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of
essive wear, you should have the wheel align-
ed Service Centre.
cordoba_ingles Seite 187 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Tyre service life
The service life of tyres is dependent on tyre pressure, driving
style and fitting.
Wear indicators
The original tyres on your veh
indicators fig. 127 runnin
there will be six to eight of th
the tyre sidewall (for instance
positions of the tread wear in
law is 1.6 mm (measured in t
tors). Worn tyres must be rep
countries .
Tyre pressure
Incorrect tyre pressure causes
For this reason, the tyre press
page 186.
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceler
Changing wheels around
If the front tyres are worn con
to change them around as sh
about the same time.
Wheel balance
The wheels on new vehicles a
tered in normal driving can ca
in steering vibration.
Unbalanced wheels should b
wear on steering, suspension
when a new tyre is fitted.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect wheel alignment ca
the vehicle. If tyres show exc
ment checked by an Authoris
Fig. 127 Tyre tread wear indicators
Fig. 128 Changing wheels
Checking and refilling levels188
res. Radial tyres have the tyre designations
ample:
ormation:
following information:
bol
vy-duty tyres.
o indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly only
).
xample, that the tyre was produced in the 11th
yres and wheels is carried out by an Authorised
iar with the procedure and have the necessary
as well as the proper facilities for disposing of
has full information on the technical require-
ging tyres, wheels or wheel trims.
se only use wheels and tyres which have been odel. Failure to do so could impair vehicle
cordoba_ingles Seite 188 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
WARNING
There is a serious danger of accidents if a tyre bursts during driving!
The tyres must be replaced at the latest when the tread is worn down to the tread wear indicators. Failure to do so could result in an accident. Worn tyres do not grip well at high speeds on wet roads. There is also a greater risk of aquaplaning.
At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes more. This causes it to overheat. This can cause tread separation and tyre blow-out. Risk of accident. Always observe the recommended tyre pres- sures.
If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the running gear checked by an Authorised Service Centre.
Keep chemicals such as oil, fuel and brake fluid away from tyres.
Damaged wheels and tyres must be replaced immediately!
For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.
New tyres and wheels
New tyres and wheels have to be run-in.
The tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicles design. The
tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially matched to the characteristics
of the vehicle and make a major contribution to good road holding and safe
handling .
Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and not individually (i.e. both front
tyres or both rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre designations makes it
easier to choose the correct ty
marked on the sidewall, for ex
195/65 R15 91T
This contains the following inf
195 Tyre width in mm
65 Height/width ratio in %
R Tyre construction: Radial
15 Rim diameter in inches
91 Load rating code
T Speed rating
The tyres could also have the
A direction of rotation sym
Reinforced denotes hea
The manufacturing date is als
on the inner side of the wheel
DOT ... 1103 ... means, for e
week of 2003.
We recommend that work on t
Service Centre. They are famil
special tools and spare parts
the old tyres.
Any Authorised Service Centre
ments when installing or chan
WARNING
We recommend that you u approved by SEAT for your m handling. Risk of accident.
Checking and refilling levels 189
Safety Fir Technical Data
ures that wheels are fitted securely and that the
ctly.
may not use wheel bolts from a different car -
page 162.
htened correctly, the wheel could become accident.
clean and turn easily. Never apply grease or oil
ich belong to the wheel.
f the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen on. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is d threads could be damaged.
eel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
e the vehicles handling on snow and
res will considerably improve the vehicles
mer tyres (width, rubber compound, tread
and snow.
to a pressure 0.2 bar higher than the pressures
ee sticker on tank flap).
all four wheels.
cordoba_ingles Seite 189 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that are more than six years old. If you have no alternative, you should drive slowly and with extra care at all times.
Never use old tyres or those with an unknown history of use.
If wheel trims are retrofitted, you must ensure that the flow of air to the brakes is not restricted. This could cause them to overheat.
All four wheels must be fitted with radial tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and the same tread pattern.
For the sake of the environment Old tyres must be disposed of according to the laws in the country concerned.
Note For technical reasons, it is not generally possible to use the wheels from
other vehicles. This can also apply to wheels of the same model. The use of
wheels or tyres which have not been approved by SEAT for use with your
model may invalidate the vehicle's type approval for use on public roads.
If the spare tyre is not the same as the tyres that are mounted on the
vehicle - for example with winter tyres - you should only use the spare tyre for
a short period of time and drive with extra care. Refit the normal road wheel
as soon as possible.
Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct torque.
The design of wheel bolts is matched to the rims. If different wheel rims are
fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt
heads must be used. This ens
brake system functions corre
In certain circumstances, you
even if it is the same model
WARNING
If the wheel bolts are not tig loose while driving. Risk of
The wheel bolts must be to them.
Use only wheel bolts wh
If the prescribed torque o whilst the vehicle is in moti too high, the wheel bolts an
Caution The prescribed torque for wh
Winter tyres
Winter tyres will improv
ice.
In winter conditions winter ty
handling. The design of sum
pattern) gives less grip on ice
Winter tyres must be inflated
specified for summer tyres (s
Winter tyres must be fitted on
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels190
ly to the front wheels, and only to certain tyre
itch links which do not protrude more that 15
trim rings before fitting snow chains. For safety
in any Authorised Service Centre, must then be
ns provided by the snow chain manufacturer.
ains to drive on roads which are free of snow.
dling, damage the tyres and wear out very
imit for using snow chains is 50 km/h. The legal
hould be followed.
cordoba_ingles Seite 190 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Information on permitted winter tyre sizes can be found in the vehicle's regis-
tration documents. Use only radial winter tyres. All tyre sizes listed in the
vehicle documentation also apply to winter tyres.
Winter tyres lose their effectiveness when the tread is worn down to a depth
of 4 mm.
The speed rating code page 188, New tyres and wheels determines the
following speed limits:
Q max. 160 km/h
S max. 180 km/h
T max. 190 km/h
H max. 210 km/h
In some countries, vehicles which can exceed the speed rating of the fitted
tyre must have an appropriate sticker in the driver's field of view. These
stickers are available from your Authorised Service Centre. The legal require-
ments of each country must be followed.
Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessarily long periods. Vehicles with
summer tyres handle better when the roads are free of snow and ice.
If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the notes on the spare wheel
page 188, New tyres and wheels.
WARNING
The maximum speed for the winter tyres must not be exceeded. Otherwise, this could lead to tyre damage and thus, an accident risk.
For the sake of the environment Fit your summer tyres in good time. They are quieter, do not wear so quickly
and reduce fuel consumption.
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted on
sizes page 222.
Snow chains must have fine-p
mm, including the chain lock.
Remove wheel hub covers and
reasons cover caps, available
fitted over the wheel bolts.
WARNING
Observe the fitting instructio
Caution You must remove the snow ch
Otherwise they will impair han
quickly.
Note In some countries, the speed l
requirements of the country s
If and when 191
Safety Fir Technical Data
factory is only designed for changing wheels t attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles
.
, level ground.
hen the vehicle is on the jack, risk of accident.
t underneath the vehicle, this must be secured se, there is a risk of injury in an accident.
re changing a wheel.
r puncture, park the vehicle as far away
as possible. Choose a location that is as
leave the vehicle. They should wait in a
behind the roadside crash barrier).
Switch on the hazard warning lights.
irmly.
cordoba_ingles Seite 191 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
If and when
Vehicle tools, spare wheel
Vehicle Tools
The tools and jack are stored under the floor panel in the
luggage compartment.
Lift floor panel
Remove the tools or jack.
The tool kit includes:
Hook for removing wheel covers* or hub caps*
Box spanner for wheel bolts
Reversible screwdriver with handle (including hexagonal interior) for the
wheel bolts. The screwdriver is a combination tool.
Towing ring*
Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*
Before replacing the jack in the storage area, wind the arm of the jack down
as far as it will go.
Some of the items listed are only provided on certain models, or are optional
extras.
WARNING
Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to tighten the wheel bolts. It is impossible to tighten the bolts with the torque neces- sary, risk of accident.
The jack supplied by the on this model. On no accoun or other loads, risk of injury
Use the jack only on firm
Never start the engine w
If work is to be carried ou by suitable stands. Otherwi
Wheel change
Preparation work
What you must do befo
If you have a flat tyre o
from the flow of traffic
level as possible.
All passengers should
safe area (for instance
Switch off the engine.
Apply the handbrake f
WARNING (continued)
If and when192
then put on the spare wheel
firmly in diagonal sequence with the box
l there are still tasks to complete.
ack in the luggage compartment.
e defective tyre in the luggage compart-
of the newly fitted tyre as soon as
ue of the wheel bolts checked as soon as
rench. The prescribed torque is 120 Nm.
l bolts are corroded and difficult to turn when
e replaced before having the wheel bolt torque
ive at moderate speeds until the wheel bolt
cordoba_ingles Seite 192 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Engage the first gear, or put the selector lever to position P for
those vehicles with an automatic gearbox.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle.
Take the vehicle tools and the spare wheel out of the luggage
compartment.
WARNING
Put the hazard warning lights on and place the warning triangle in position. This is for your own safety and also warns other road users.
Caution If you have to change the tyre on a gradient, block the wheel opposite the
wheel being changed by placing a stone or similar object under it to prevent
the vehicle from rolling away.
Note Please observe legal requirements when doing so.
Changing a wheel
Change the wheel as described below
Remove the wheel cover. Also refer to page 193, fig.
Slacken the wheel bolts.
Raise the car with the jack in the corresponding zone
Take off the wheel and
Lower the vehicle.
Tighten the wheel bolts
spanner
Replace the cover.
After changing a wheel
After changing the whee
Put the tools and jack b
Place the wheel with th
ment and secure it.
Check the tyre pressure
possible.
Have the tightening torq
possible with a torque w
Note If you notice that the whee
changing a wheel, they must b
checked.
In the interest of safety, dr
torque has been checked.
If and when 193
Safety Fir Technical Data
be removed for access to the wheel
sing the spanner and the wire
he rebates of the wheel cover.
er the hook and lever gently and carefully
e paintwork and remove hub cap.
o the wheel rim by pressing it firmly. Put
e point of the rebate for the valve. Next fit
.
Fig. 130 Remove hub caps
cordoba_ingles Seite 193 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Wheel trims
The wheel trims must be removed to gain access to the wheel
bolts.
Removing
Insert the extraction hook of the tools in the hole for this
purpose fig. 129.
Pull off the hub cap.
Wheel covers*
The wheel covers must
bolts
Removing
Remove the hub cap u
hook* fig. 130.
Hook this into one of t
Put the box spanner ov
to avoid damage to th
Fitting
Fit the wheel cover ont
pressure initially on th
the rest of the hubcap
Fig. 129 Changing a wheel: Removing the wheel trim
If and when194
to unscrew or tighten the theft inhibiting
about one turn before raising the vehicle with l bolts more than one turn can result in an acci-
socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or
ht, you may be able to loosen it by pushing
carefully with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle
to slip.
cordoba_ingles Seite 194 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Loosening and tightening the wheel bolts
The wheel bolts must be loosened before raising the vehicle.
Loosening
Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the wheel bolt.
Grasp the box spanner by the end turn it about one full turn to the
left fig. 131.
Tightening
Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the wheel bolt.
Grasp the box spanner close to the end and turn the bolt to the
right until it is secured.
An adapter is required
wheel bolts.
WARNING
Loosen the wheel bolts only the jack, loosening the whee dent.
Note Do not use the hexagonal
tighten the wheel bolts.
If the wheel bolt is very tig
down the end of the spanner
for support and take care not
Fig. 131 Changing the wheel: Loosening the wheel bolts
If and when 195
Safety Fir Technical Data
nt under the door sill closest to the wheel
132.
r the jacking point until the arm of the jack
rtical rib under the door sill.
e arm of the jack fits around the rib under
ovable base plate of the jack is flat on the
the defective wheel is just clear of the
r of the door sills mark the jacking points
en made for each wheel. Do not fit the jack
e jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the jack.
tted on solid ground offering good support. Use
cessary. On a hard, slippery surface (such as
ilar to prevent the jack from slipping.
at the base of the jack does not slip. Failure to dent.
ged if the jack is not applied at the correct a risk of injury since the jack can slip off engaged.
cordoba_ingles Seite 195 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Raising the vehicle
The vehicle must be raised with a jack to remove the wheel.
Locate the jacking poi
being changed fig.
Wind up the jack unde
is directly below the ve
Align the jack so that th
the door sill and the m
ground fig. 133.
Raise the vehicle until
ground.
Recesses at the front and rea
fig. 132. A position has be
anywhere else.
An unstable surface under th
Therefore, the jack must be fi
a large and stable base, if ne
tiles) use a rubber mat or sim
WARNING
Take all precautions so th do so could result in an acci
The vehicle can be dama jacking points. There is also suddenly if it is not properly
Fig. 132 The jacking points
Fig. 133 Fitting the jack
If and when196
an and turn easily. Before fitting the spare
f the wheel and hub mounting surfaces. These
fitting the wheel.
crewdriver handle makes it easier to turn the
se. The reversible screwdriver blade should be
d for this purpose.
n of rotation are fitted, note the direction of
ket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or
olts*
ired to turn the theft inhibiting wheel
Fig. 135 Theft inhibiting wheel bolts
cordoba_ingles Seite 196 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Removing and fitting the wheel
For removal and fitting the wheel, the following tasks must be
completed.
Change the wheel as described below after loosening the wheel
bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack.
Removing a wheel
Unscrew the bolts using the hexagonal tool in the handle of the
screwdriver (vehicle tool) and place them on a clean surface
fig. 134.
Fitting a wheel
Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten them lightly using the
hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle.
The wheel bolts should be cle
wheel, inspect the condition o
surfaces must be clean before
The hexagonal socket in the s
wheel bolts when they are loo
removed when the tool is use
If tyres with a specific directio
rotation.
Note Do not use the hexagonal soc
tighten the wheel bolts.
Theft inhibiting wheel b
A special adapter is requ
bolts.
Fig. 134 Wheel change: Hexagon socket in screw- driver handle to turn the wheel bolts after they have been loosened
If and when 197
Safety Fir Technical Data
ust be replaced
and the component concerned.
e failed component page 199.
m inside the fuse cover, fit it onto the
e fuse out.
e (which will have a melted metal strip)
same ampere rating.
its are protected by fuses. The fuses are located
d end of the dash panel. In versions with the
Fig. 136 Fuses in the dash panel
cordoba_ingles Seite 197 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Insert the adapter onto the wheel bolt and push it on as far as it
will go page 196, fig. 135.
Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the adapter.
Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt as appropriate.
Code number
The code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt is stamped on the front of the
adaptor.
The code number should be noted and kept in a safe place, as it is only by
using the code number that a duplicate adaptor can be obtained from an
Authorised Service Centre.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
Tyres with directional tread pattern must be fitted so that they
rotate in the correct direction.
A directional tread pattern can be identified by arrows on the sidewall that
point in the direction of rotation. Always note the direction of rotation indi-
cated when fitting the wheel. This is important so that these tyres can give
maximum grip and avoid excessive noise, tread wear and aquaplaning.
If, in an emergency, you have to fit the spare wheel so it rotates in the wrong
direction, you must drive extremely carefully. The tyre will not give optimum
performance. This is particularly important when driving on wet roads.
To benefit from the advantages of tyres with this type of tread pattern, the
defective tyre should be replaced as soon as possible so that all tyres again
rotate in the correct direction.
Fuses
Changing a fuse
If a fuse has blown it m
fuse cover
Switch off the ignition
Identify the fuse for th
Take the plastic clip fro
blown fuse and pull th
Replace the blown fus
with a new fuse of the
The individual electrical circu
behind a cover at the left-han
If and when198
cordoba_ingles Seite 198 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
steering wheel on the right the fuses are on the right-hand side of the instru-
ment panel, behind a cover.
The electric windows are protected by circuit breakers. These reset automat-
ically after a few seconds when the overload (caused for example by frozen
windows) has been corrected.
Colour coding of fuses
WARNING
Never repair damaged fuses and never replace them with fuses with a higher rating. Failure to comply could result in fire. This could also cause damage to other parts of the electrical system.
Note If a newly replaced fuse blows again after a short time, the electrical
system must be checked by a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
If you replace a fuse with a stronger fuse, you could cause damage to
another location in the electrical system.
Always keep some spare fuses in the vehicle. These are available from
official Service.
Colour Amperes
Beige 5
Brown 7,5
red 10
blue 15
yellow 20
natural (white) 25
green 30
If and when 199
Safety Fir Technical Data
Amperes
15
10
5
5
5
5
5
10
5
5
5
5
10
10
15
5
Electric mirror 10
10
10
10
cordoba_ingles Seite 199 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Fuses on left side of dash panel
Fuses
Number Electrical equipment
1 Secondary water pump 1.8 20 VT (T16)
2 ABS/ESP
3 Vacant
4 Brake light, clutch switch, relay coils
5 Engine control unit (petrol)
6 Right side light
7 Left side light
8 Mirror heating unit
9 Lambda probe
10 SignalSa). Radio unit
11 Electric mirror power supply
12 Headlamp height adjustment
13 Oil pressure/level sensor
14 Additional heating engine/fuel pump
15 Automatic gearbox unit
16 Heated seats
17 Engine control unit
18 Instrument panel /Heating and ventilation, Navigation, Headlamp height adjustment,
19 Reverse light
20 Windscreen washer pump
21 Main beam headlight, right
If and when200
10
5
10
10
10
5
10
5
5
25
15
15
20
25
20
15
15
30
15
15
15
25
25
Amperes
cordoba_ingles Seite 200 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
22 Main beam headlight, left
23 Number plate light/side light indicator
24 Rear windscreen wiper
25 Injectors(fuel)
26 Brake light switch /ESP (Turn sensor)
27 Instrument panel/Diagnosis
28 Unit: glovebox light, boot light, interior light
29 Climatronic
30 Power supply central locking unit
31 Left front window control
32 Vacant
33 Self powered alarm horn
34 Engine control unit
35 Sunroof
36 Engine ventilator heating /blower
37 Headlight washer pump
38 Front and rear fog lights
39 Engine control unit (petrol)
40 Engine control unit diesel + SDI Fuel pump
41 Fuel gauge
42 Ignition transformer+ Engine control unit T70
43 Dipped headlight (right side)
44 Left rear window control
45 Front right window control
Number Electrical equipment
If and when 201
Safety Fir Technical Data
20
20
15
15
15
20
20
15
25
ut removing the key from the steering and starter lock,
vated on removing the key from the steering and starter
Amperes
40
40
40
Amperes
cordoba_ingles Seite 201 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Fuses below steering wheel in relay holder
PTC fuses
46 Windscreen wiper unit
47 Heated rear window unit
48 Indicator unit
49 Cigarette lighter
50 Locking unit
51 Radio/CD/GPS/Telephone
52 Horn
53 Dipped headlight (left side)
54 Right rear window control
a) The signal Sis a system which includes the starter and steering lock and enables, after the ignition is switched off and witho
certain electrical components to be switched on, including for example, the radio, the courtesy light, etc. This function is deacti
lock.
Number Electrical equipment
1 PTCs (Supplementary electrical heating using air)
2 PTCs (Supplementary electrical heating using air)
3 PTCs (Supplementary electrical heating using air)
Number Electrical equipment
If and when202
Amperes
175
110
50
50
40
40
cordoba_ingles Seite 202 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Fuses in engine compartment above battery
Metal fuses
Fig. 137 Fuse box above battery
Number Electrical equipment
1 Alternator/Starter motor
2 Power supply voltage distributor inside vehicle
3 Power assisted steering pump
4 Spark plug preheating (diesel)
5 Electroblower clima heater/fan
6 ABS unit
If and when 203
Safety Fir Technical Data
Amperes
25
30
10
5
5
5
Amperes
150
200
80
100
80/50
cordoba_ingles Seite 203 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Non-metal fuses
Position in engine compartment: side box
Fuses
Number Electrical equipment
7 ABS unit
8 Electroblower clima heater/fan
9 ABS unit
10 Cable control unit
11 Clima fan
12 Vacant
13 Jatco unit for automatic gearbox
14 Vacant
15 Vacant
16 Vacant
Number Electrical equipment
B1 Alternator < 140 W
Alternator > 140 W
C1 Power steering
D1 PTCs (Supplementary electrical heating using air)
E1 Ventilator > 500 W / Ventilator < 500
If and when204
4)
100
50
Amperes
he bulbs must be changed by an Authorised Service
ents of the vehicle must be removed and that the au-
reset.
.5 times as much light flux and have a useful life five
mps, this means that, except in case of an abnormal
e the bulbs during the vehicle life.
cordoba_ingles Seite 204 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Some of the electrical items listed in the table are only fitted on certain
models or are optional extras.
Please note that the above list, while correct at the time of printing, is subject
to alterations.
Lamp change
General notes
Before changing any lamp first turn off the equipment concerned.
Do not touch the lamp glass. Fingerprints vaporise in the heat, causing a
reduction in the lamp life and condensation on the mirror surface, thus
reducing efficiency.
A lamp should only be placed by one of the same type. The designation is
inscribed on the bulb, either on the glass part or on the base.
It is highly recommended to keep a box of spare lamps in the vehicle. At the
very least, the lamps that most affect road safety should have spares in the
vehicle.
Rear lights on frame
Brake/side 12V/P21/5W
Indicator 12V/P21W
Rear lights on tailgate
small side light 12V/W5W
fog light 12V/P21W
reverse 12V/P21W
Single reflector headlamps
main/dipped 12V 60/55W (H
indicator 12V/PY21W
side 12/W5W
Double reflector headlamps
dipped 12V/55W (H7)
main 12V/55W (H3)
indicator 12V/PY21W
side 12V/W5W
Xenon headlights6)
dipped 12V/35W (D1S)7)
main 12V/55W (H7)
indicator 12V/PY21W
side 12V/W5W
F1 Multi-terminal voltage supply 30. Internal fuse box
G1 Trailer fuse voltage supply in internal fuse box
H1 Vacant
Number Electrical equipment
6) For these type of headlights, t
Centre, given that complex elem
tomatic control system must be 7) Xenon discharge lamps emit 2
times greater than halogen la
fault, there is no need to chang
If and when 205
Safety Fir Technical Data
Fig. 138 Main headlight lamps
Fig. 139 Main headlight lamps
cordoba_ingles Seite 205 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Fog lights*
Fog lights 12V/55W (H3)
Registration plate light
Registration plate light - C5W
Caution The halogen lamps (H3, H7, H4...) are pressurised and might explode on
changing them.
Therefore protective gloves and glasses should be worn when changing a
halogen lamp.
Note Due to the difficulty in accessing the lamps, these must be changed by an
Authorised Service Centre. However, we shall explain how to change these
lamps, except for the xenon lights*.
Main headlight lamps
Dipped headlights
Main beam headlights
AA
AB
If and when206
fig. 140 outwards in the direction of the
over.
connector fig. 141.
g and remove.
it the new lamp in the same position,
ectly.
ng on the lamp base and clip on.
replace the loops fig. 140.
justment
Fig. 141 Dipped head- light lamp
AA
A2
cordoba_ingles Seite 206 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Side lights
Indicator lights
Dipped headlight lamp
Raise the bonnet.
Remove the loops arrow and remove the c
Remove the lamp cable
Undo the retainer sprin
Remove the lamp and f
making sure it sits corr
Press the retaining spri
Plug in the connector.
Fit the plastic cover and
Check the headlight ad
AC
AD
Fig. 140 Dipped head- light lamp
A2
If and when 207
Safety Fir Technical Data
fig. 142 outwards in the direction of the
cover.
e connector fig. 143.
g and remove.
fit the new lamp in the same position,
rectly.
ing on the lamp base and clip on.
cable.
d replace the loops fig. 142.
djustment
AB
A2
cordoba_ingles Seite 207 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Main beam lights
Raise the bonnet.
Remove the loops arrow and remove the
Remove the lamp cabl
Undo the retainer sprin
Remove the lamp and
making sure it sits cor
Press the retaining spr
Plug in the connection
Fit the plastic cover an
Check the headlight aFig. 142 Main beam lamp
Fig. 143 Main beam lamp
A2
If and when208
fig. 144 in the direction of the arrow and
lease the lamp holder from the casing
place.
reverse order.
secure the loop.
cordoba_ingles Seite 208 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Side beam lights
Raise the bonnet.
Remove the loops remove the cover.
Pull on the cables to re
fig. 145.
Pull on the lamp and re
To assemble proceed in
Fit the plastic cover and
Fig. 144 Side lights
Fig. 145 Side lights
A1
AC
If and when 209
Safety Fir Technical Data
fig. 146 in the direction of the arrow and
o the left and remove from casing
the reverse order.
d secure the loop.
cordoba_ingles Seite 209 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Turn indicator lamps
Raise the bonnet.
Remove the loops remove the cover.
Turn the lamp holder t
fig. 147 .
Installation is done in
Fit the plastic cover an
Fig. 146 Indicator lights
Fig. 147 Indicator lights
A1
AD
If and when210
screws fig. 148 and when released
er to the left a quarter turn.
.
spring and remove.
it the new lamp in the same position,
ectly.
ng on the lamp base and clip on.
ver and the headlamp is carried out in
AF
cordoba_ingles Seite 210 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Fog lights
Remove the grille, taking out the screw fig. 148, carefully
pull the grille on the side of the screw and release the cover
Undo the two fastening
unplug the connector
Turn the headlamp cov
Unplug the lamp cable
Undo the lamp retainer
Remove the lamp and f
making sure it sits corr
Press the retaining spri
Plug in the lamp cable.
The assembly of the co
reverse order.
Fig. 148 Fog lights
Fig. 149 Fog lights
AA
If and when 211
Safety Fir Technical Data
verse light
Fig. 151 Rear light on tailgate
Fig. 152 Rear light on tailgate
cordoba_ingles Seite 211 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Side indicator lamps
Press the indicator to the left or to the right to remove the lamp.
Remove the lamp holder from the indicator.
Remove the broken glass bulb and replace with a new bulb.
Insert the lamp holder in the indicator guide until it clicks into
place.
First fit the indicator in the opening in the chassis, fastening the
tabs fig. 150, and then fit in the lamp as shown by the
arrow fig. 150
Rear lights on tailgate
Side light 1/ Fog light/ re
Open the tailgate.
Fig. 150 Side indicators
A1
A2
If and when212
Indicator light
the boot
153 to release the lamp holder and
rn to left. Pull on the small lamp.
ce.
ssing inwards and turn 1/4 turn to the
lamp in casing and press.
wards where the small lamp is housed.
is heard
Fig. 153 Rear lights on frame
cordoba_ingles Seite 212 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Remove plastic cover page 211, fig. 151, insert finger in
opening and pull in the direction of the arrow.
Press the tabs page 211, fig. 152 of the lamp holder and
remove lampholder.
Turn bigger lamp 1/4 turn to left. Pull on the small lamp.
Remove lamp and replace.
Fit the bigger lamp, pressing inwards and turn 1/4 turn to the
right. Place the smaller lamp into the casing and press.
Carefully fit the lampholder in the casing and press until a clic
is heard.
Next replace the cover and press down.
Note Make sure that when assembling all seals and rubbers are correctly fitted.
Rear lights on frame
Side light 2/ Brake light/
Open the tailgate.
Separate the trim from
Press the tab fig.
remove
Turn bigger lamp 1/4 tu
Remove lamp and repla
Fit the bigger lamp, pre
right. Place the smaller
Position lamp holder to
Next press until a click
AA
AB
AA
If and when 213
Safety Fir Technical Data
er between the casing and the
lass, levering it to avoid possible damage.
s.
lamp, hold and press to one side.
order, pressing gently on the outer edge
he fastening tabs over the frame of the
front part until the two long tabs click on
*
n the replacement of this light it should be done
ve, between the light and the glove box.
ght Next lift the light out sideways.
cordoba_ingles Seite 213 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Note Make sure that when assembling all seals and rubbers are correctly fitted.
Number plate light
Release transparent lamp cover by levering the tab with the flat
part of a screwdriver.
Remove the defective lamp from the lamp holder, holding it in
the centre, press to one side and fit new lamp
Fit lamp cover in its space, taking special care when replacing the
rubber seal and press until it clicks into place.
Interior light and front reading light
To remove glass
Insert a fine screwdriv
glass fig. 154.
Carefully remove the g
To replace the lamps
Pull the lamps outward
To remove the central
Assembly
Proceed in the reverse
of the side light.
First fit the glass with t
switch. Next press the
the support.
Additional brake lights
Given the difficulty involved i
by the Technical Service.
Glovebox light*
Insert screwdriver abo
Carefully remove the liFig. 154 Front reading light
If and when214
e a sufficient wire cross section.
use of a discharged battery, the battery can be
other vehicle to start the engine.
the standard DIN 72553 (see manufacturer's
s section must be at least 25 mm2 for petrol
for diesel engines.
h each other, otherwise electricity could flow as
are connected.
st be properly connected to the vehicles elec-
cordoba_ingles Seite 214 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Replace the bulb .
Insert the light on the connector side, first underneath then push
at the top until it clicks into place.
Luggage compartment lighting*
The luggage compartment lighting is located in the upper section,
on the back of the stowage tray.
Insert screwdriver in the opening on the left-hand side
fig. 155.
Replace the bulb.
Refit the light on the connector side, next press upwards, until it
clicks into place.
Jump-starting
Jump leads
The jump lead must hav
If the engine fails to start beca
connected to the battery of an
Jump leads
Jump leads must comply with
documentation). The wire cros
engines and at least 35 mm2
Note The vehicles must not touc
soon as the positive terminals
The discharged battery mu
trical system.
Fig. 155 Luggage compartment lighting
If and when 215
Safety Fir Technical Data
of the black jump lead to a solid metal
olted on to the engine block, or onto the
he vehicle with the flat battery. Do not
ar the battery .
uch a way that they cannot come into
g parts in the engine compartment.
vehicle with the boosting battery and let
car with the flat battery and wait one or
ngine is running.
jump leads, switch off the headlights (if
wer and rear window heater in the vehicle
is helps minimise voltage peaks which are
ads are disconnected.
nning, disconnect the leads in reverse
en above.
o they have good metal-to-metal contact with
itch off the starter after about 10 seconds and
inute.
AX
cordoba_ingles Seite 215 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Jump-starting: decription
In fig. 156, the flat battery is A and the charged battery B.
Jump lead terminal connections
Switch off the ignition on both vehicles .
1. Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive fig. 156
terminal of the vehicle with the flat battery .
2. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive
terminal in the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal
on the battery of the vehicle providing assistance.
4. Connect the other end
component which is b
engine block itself of t
connect it to a point ne
5. Position the leads in s
contact with any movin
Starting
6. Start the engine of the
it run at idling speed.
7. Start the engine of the
two minutes until the e
Removing the jump leads
8. Before you remove the
they are switched on).
9. Turn on the heater blo
with the flat battery. Th
generated when the le
10. When the engine is ru
order to the details giv
Connect the battery clamps s
the battery terminals.
If the engine fails to start, sw
try again after about half a m
Fig. 156 How to connect the jump leads
A+
A+
A-
If and when216
cordoba_ingles Seite 216 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
WARNING
Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine compartment page 169, Working in the engine compartment.
The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on battery). Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.
Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, danger of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads.
Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion.
Do not attach the negative cable from the other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to the brake line.
The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.
Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
Do not bend over the batteries. This could result in chemical burns.
Note The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as
soon as the positive terminals are connected.
If and when 217
Safety Fir Technical Data
ing points if you use a tow-rope:
towing vehicle
til the tow-rope is taut. Then accelerate
rs cautiously. If you are driving an auto-
te gently.
ke servo and power steering are not
you are towing. Brake earlier than you
ith a more gentle pressure on the brake.
towed vehicle
pe remains taut at all times when towing.
Fig. 157 Towing eye at the front of the vehicle
cordoba_ingles Seite 217 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Towing and tow-starting
Tow-starting*
The use of jump leads is preferable to tow-starting.
We recommend that you do not tow-start your vehicle. Jump-starting
is preferable page 214.
However, if your vehicle has to be tow-started:
Engage the 2nd or the 3rd gear.
Keep the clutch pressed down.
Switch on the ignition.
Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.
As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the gear-
stick into neutral. This helps to prevent driving into the towing
vehicle.
WARNING
The risk of accidents is high when tow-starting. The vehicle being towed can easily collide with the towing vehicle.
Caution When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
Towing eyes
Please observe the follow
Notes for the driver of the
Drive slowly at first un
gradually.
Begin and change gea
matic vehicle, accelera
Remember that the bra
working in the vehicle
would normally, but w
Notes for the driver of the
Ensure that the tow-ro
If and when218
ork if the engine is not running, you must apply
the brake pedal than you normally would.
does not work if the engine is not running, you
er than you normally would.
atic gearbox
position N.
km/h when towing a vehicle.
km.
sed, the vehicle must be towed with the front
ts when towing or tow-starting.
ing lights of both vehicles. However, observe
y.
icles with an automatic gearbox must not be
eans that there is no lubricant in the gearbox,
ls while the vehicle is being towed.
ed more than 50 km, the front wheels must be
ing should be carried out by a qualified person.
d when the vehicle has no electrical power. The
ith the front wheels raised. Towing should be
on.
the rear bumper is a towline point.
cordoba_ingles Seite 218 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Fitting the front towing eye
First remove the right hand cover from the lower part of the
bumper.
Remove screw page 217, fig. 157.
Take the towing ring and the wheel spanner out of the vehicle
tool kit.
Turn the ring to the left with the box spanner until it is correctly
screwed in.
To remove the ring, turn to the right with the box spanner.
Tow-rope or tow-bar
It is easier and safer to tow a vehicle with a tow-bar. You should only use a
tow-rope if you do not have a tow-bar.
A tow-rope should be slightly elastic to reduce the loading on both vehicles.
It is advisable to use a tow-rope made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic
material.
Attach the tow-rope or the tow-bar only to the towing eyes provided or a
towing bracket.
Driving style
Towing requires some experience, especially when using a tow-rope. Both
drivers should be familiar with the technique required for towing. Inexperi-
enced drivers should not attempt to tow-start or tow away another vehicle.
Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the
tow-rope. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of over-
loading and damaging the anchorage points.
The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the
steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the turn signals,
horn, windscreen wipers and washers.
As the brake servo does not w
considerably more pressure to
As the power assisted steering
will need more strength to ste
Towing vehicles with an autom
Put the selector lever into
Do not drive faster than 50
Do not tow further than 50
If a breakdown vehicle is u
wheels raised.
Note Observe legal requiremen
Switch on the hazard warn
any regulations to the contrar
For technical reasons, veh
tow-started.
If damage to your vehicle m
you must raise the drive whee
If the vehicle has to be tow
raised during towing, and tow
The steering wheel is locke
vehicle must then be towed w
carried out by a qualified pers
Rear towline anchorage
At the rear, on the right below
AA
General notes on the technical data 219
Safety Fir Technical Data
if additional equipment is fitted, for different
nd for other countries.
cordoba_ingles Seite 219 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Technical Data
General notes on the technical data
What you should be aware of
General notes
All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence over this data.
All data in these documents are valid for the basic model as offered in Spain.
The vehicle data card included in the inspection and maintenance schedule
in the vehicles registration documents show which engine is installed in the
vehicle.
The figures may be different
models, for special vehicles a
Abbreviations used in this paragraph of the Technical Data
Abbreviation Meaning
kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
bhp Brake horse power, formerly used to denote engine power
at rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.
Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
l/100 km Fuel consumption in litres per 100 kilometres
g/km Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per kilometre.
CO2 Carbon dioxide
CN Cetane number, indication of the ignition quality of the diesel.
RON Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance of petrol.
General notes on the technical data220
cordoba_ingles Seite 220 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Vehicle identification data
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (chassis number) can be read from outside
the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen. This is located on the left-
hand side of the vehicle in the lower area of the windscreen. It is also located
on the right hand side of the engine compartment.
Type plate
The type plate is located on the left rib inside the engine compartment.
Vehicle data
The data sticker is placed on the inside of the spare wheel recess in the
luggage compartment.
The following information can be found in the vehicle information:
Vehicle identification number (chassis number)
Vehicle type / engine power / gearbox type
Engine and gearbox code / paint number / interior equipment
Optional extras / PR numbers
This vehicle data are also contained in the Inspection and Maintenance
schedule Booklet Inspection and Maintenance schedule.
General notes on the technical data 221
Safety Fir Technical Data
out on a rolling road test bed. The test criteria
in all gears, as in normal everyday driving. The
r the urban cycle and 63% for the extra urban
xide emissions. The gas composition is then
cordoba_ingles Seite 221 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
How are the figures measured?
Fuel consumption
Fuel consumption and emission values are determined according to Euro-
pean Commission Directive 99/100/EC. They take the actual kerb weight
(weight class) into consideration. To calculate the consumption rate, two
measuring cycles are carried
are as follows:
Note The fuel consumption and emission values quoted in the tables below are
based on an empty basic vehicle without optional extras. The kerb weight of
the vehicle may vary depending on the equipment fitted and thus the weight
category with a relative increase of consumption and emission of CO2 Your
Authorised Service Centre will be able to inform you of the figures which apply
to your vehicle.
Actual consumption may vary from quoted test values, depending on
personal driving style, road and traffic conditions, the weather and the condi-
tion of the vehicle.
Urban cycle The urban cycle starts with an engine cold start. City driving is then simulated.
Extra urban cycle In the extra urban cycle the vehicle undergoes frequent acceleration and braking
road speed ranges from 0 to 120 km/h.
Combined The average overall consumption is calculated with a weighting of around 37% fo
cycle.
CO2 emissions The exhaust gases are collected during both driving cycles to calculate carbon dio
analysed to evaluate the CO2 content and other emissions.
General notes on the technical data222
t exerted by the trailer drawbar on the ball joint
t exceed 75 kg.
e recommend that you always tow
awbar load. The response of the trailer on the
r load is too small.
rawbar load cannot be met (e.g. with small,
axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with an axle
least 4% of the actual trailer weight is a legal
.
ould not drive at speeds above 80 km/h when plies to countries where higher speeds are
m trailer weights or the draw bar loading. If the permissible total weight is exceeded, the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, ehicle.
ins, wheel bolts
ure values can be found on the inside of the
lues given there are for cold tyres. The slightly
s must not be reduced .
cordoba_ingles Seite 222 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Weights
Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity
and without optional extras. The figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for the
weight of the driver.
For special versions and optional equipment fittings or for the addition of
accessories, the weight of the vehicle will increase .
WARNING
Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting heavy objects; this may affect the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci- dent. Always adjust your speed and driving style to suit road conditions and requirements.
Never exceed the gross axle weight rating or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Towing a trailer
Trailer weights
Trailer weights
The trailer weights and drawbar loads approved are selected in intensive
trials according to precisely defined criteria. The approved trailer weights are
valid for vehicles in EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (in certain circum-
stances up to 100 km/h). The figures may be different in other countries. All
data in the official vehicle documents take precedence over these data .
Drawbar load
The maximum permitted weigh
of the towing bracket must no
In the interest of road safety, w
approaching the maximum dr
road will be poor if the drawba
If the maximum permissible d
empty and light-weight single
base of less than 1 metre), at
stipulation for a drawbar load
WARNING
For safety reasons, you sh towing a trailer. This also ap permitted.
Never exceed the maximu the permissible axle load or driving characteristics of the injuries and damage to the v
Wheels
Tyre pressure, snow cha
Tyre pressures
The sticker with the tyre press
tank flap. The tyre pressure va
raised pressures of warm tyre
General notes on the technical data 223
Safety Fir Technical Data
cordoba_ingles Seite 223 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels. Chains may be used on
the following tyres 155/80 R 13; 165/70 R 14 and 185/80 R 14.
Consult the chapter wheels of this manual.
Wheel bolts
After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench . The tight-
ening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Correct tyre pressure is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an increased danger of accidents, particularly at high speeds.
If the torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads could be damaged.
Note We recommend that you ask your Authorised Service Centre for information
about appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.
Technical Data224
ions and restrictions on the technical data are
ccording to engine.
cordoba_ingles Seite 224 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Technical Data
Checking fluid levels
From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the
vehicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids, to do
so may cause serious damage to the engine.
Radiator expansion tank
Engine oil dipstick.
Engine oil filler cap
Brake fluid reservoir
Battery
Windscreen washer fluid container
The checking and replenishment of the service fluids are carried out on the
components mentioned above. These operations are described in the
page 169.
Overview
Further explanations, instruct
contained as of page 219
Note The layout of parts may vary a
Fig. 158 Diagram for the location of the various elements
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
Technical Data 225
Safety Fir Technical Data
l 91 RONa)b)
7.7/ 185
5.1/ 122
6.0/ 144
cordoba_ingles Seite 225 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Petrol engine 1.2 47 kW (64 CV)
General engine data
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 47 (64)/ 5000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 112/ 3000
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 3/ 1198
Compression 10.4
Fuel Super 95 RONa)/Norma
a) Research-Octane-Number = Measure of the predetonation power of the petrol. b) With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 168
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 10.3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 15.7
Urban cycle 7.6/ 182
Extra urban cycle 5.1/ 122
Combined 5.9/ 142
Technical Data226
91 RONa)b)
cordoba_ingles Seite 226 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 1.4 16 V 55 kW (75 CV)
General engine data
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1580
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1141/1231
Gross axle weight, front in kg 810
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 830
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 500
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 800
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change. 3.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 55 (75)/ 5000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 126/ 3800
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1390
Compression 10.5
Fuel Super 95 RONa)/Normal
a) Research-Octane-Number = Measure of the predetonation power of the petrol. b) With a slight power loss
Technical Data 227
Safety Fir Technical Data
8.7/209
5.4/ 130
6.6/ 158
cordoba_ingles Seite 227 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 176
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 9.1
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 13.6
Urban cycle 8.6/ 206
Extra urban cycle 5.3/ 127
Combined 6.5/ 156
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1594
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1150/1251
Gross axle weight, front in kg 815
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 840
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 500
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 800
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change. 3.5 litres
Technical Data228
91 RONb)
cordoba_ingles Seite 228 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Petrol engine 1.4 16 V 55 kW (75 CV) Automatic
General engine data
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 55 (75)/ 5000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 126/ 3800
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1390
Compression 10.5
Fuel Super 95 RONa)/Normal
a) Research-Octane-Number = Measure of the predetonation power of the petrol. b) With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 172
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 10.3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 15.9
Urban cycle 10.3/247
Extra urban cycle 6.0/144
Combined 7.6/182
Technical Data 229
Safety Fir Technical Data
95 RONa)b)
cordoba_ingles Seite 229 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 1.4 16 V 74 kW (101 CV)
General engine data
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1623
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1182/1271
Gross axle weight, front in kg 847
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 830
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 500
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 800
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change. 3.5 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 74 (101)/ 6000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 126/ 4400
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1390
Compression 10.5
Fuel Super 98 RONa)/Super
a) Research-Octane-Number = Measure of the predetonation power of the petrol. b) With a slight power loss
Technical Data230
9.0/216
5.4/130
6.7/161
cordoba_ingles Seite 230 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 193
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7.5
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 11.5
Urban cycle 8.9/214
Extra urban cycle 5.3/127
Combined 6.6/158
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1585
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1141/1242
Gross axle weight, front in kg 812
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 835
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 500
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1000
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change. 3.5 litres
Technical Data 231
Safety Fir Technical Data
l 91 RON b)
11.0/264
6.0/144
7.8/187
cordoba_ingles Seite 231 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Petrol engine 2.0 85 kW (115 CV)
General engine data
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 85 (115)/ 5400
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 170/ 2400
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1984
Compression 10.5 0.5
Fuel Super 95 RON a)/Norma
Maximum speed in km/h 200
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7.1
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10.4
Urban cycle 10.9/262
Extra urban cycle 5.9/142
Combined 7.7/185
a) Research-Octane-Number = Measure of the predetonation power of the petrol. b) With a slight power loss
Technical Data232
cordoba_ingles Seite 232 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Diesel engine 1.4l TDI 51 kW (70 bhp)
General engine data
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1653
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1197/1305
Gross axle weight, front in kg 865
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 847
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 600
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change. 4.5 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 51 (70)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 195/2200
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 3/1422
Compression 19.5 0.5
Fuel Min 49 CNa)
a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel
Technical Data 233
Safety Fir Technical Data
6.0/162
4.2/113
4.8/130
cordoba_ingles Seite 233 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 167
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 9.8
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 15.2
Urban cycle 5.9/159
Extra urban cycle 4.1/111
Combined 4.7/127
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1662
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1219/1318
Gross axle weight, front in kg 887
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 840
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 600
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change. 3.8 litres
Technical Data234
5.7/154
4.1/111
4.6/124
cordoba_ingles Seite 234 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Diesel engine 1.4l TDI 55 kW (75 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 55 (75)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 195/ 2200
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 3/ 1422
Compression 19.5 0.5
Fuel Min 49 CNa)
a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel
Maximum speed in km/h 174
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 9.1
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 14.2
Urban cycle 5.6/151
Extra urban cycle 4.0/108
Combined 4.5/122
Technical Data 235
Safety Fir Technical Data
cordoba_ingles Seite 235 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Diesel engine 1.4l TDI 59 kW (80 bhp)
General engine data
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1659
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1239/1342
Gross axle weight, front in kg 935
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 825
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 600
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change. 3.8 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 59 (80)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 195/2200
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 3/1422
Compression 19.5 0.5
Fuel Min 49 CNa)
a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel.
Technical Data236
5.8/157
4.2/113
4.7/127
cordoba_ingles Seite 236 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 177
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 8.9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 13.2
Urban cycle 5.7/154
Extra urban cycle 4.1/111
Combined 4.6/124
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1662
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1219/1318
Gross axle weight, front in kg 887
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 840
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 600
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change. 4.3 litres
Technical Data 237
Safety Fir Technical Data
6.4/173
4.1/111
4.9/132
cordoba_ingles Seite 237 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Diesel engine 1.9l SDI 47 kW (64 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 47(64)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 125/ 1600-2800
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1896
Compression 19.5
Fuel Min 49 CNa)
a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel.
Maximum speed in km/h 165
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 11.7
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 17.9
Urban cycle 6.3/170
Extra urban cycle 4.0/108
Combined 5.8/130
Technical Data238
cordoba_ingles Seite 238 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1647
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1227/1317
Gross axle weight, front in kg 882
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 825
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 600
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change. 4.3 litres
Technical Data 239
Safety Fir Technical Data
6.5/176
4.1/111
5.0/135
cordoba_ingles Seite 239 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Diesel engine 1.9l TDI 47 kW (101 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 74(101)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 240/ 1800-2400
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1896
Compression 19
Fuel Min 49 CNa)
a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel.
Maximum speed in km/h 192
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7.6
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 11.1
Urban 6.4/173
Extra urban cycle 4.0/108
Combined 5.9/132
Technical Data240
cordoba_ingles Seite 240 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1683
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1263/1375
Gross axle weight, front in kg 882
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 825
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 600
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change. 4.3 litres
Technical Data 241
Safety Fir Technical Data
cordoba_ingles Seite 241 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Diesel engine 1.9l TDI 96 kW (131 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
Consumption (litres/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 96(131)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 310/ 1900
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1896
Compression 19
Fuel Min 49 CNa)
a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel.
Maximum speed in km/h 210
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6.6
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 9.5
Urban cycle 6.9/186
Extra urban cycle 4.4/119
Combined 5.3/143
Technical Data242
cordoba_ingles Seite 242 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1733
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1313/1402
Gross axle weight, front in kg 955
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 830
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 600
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change. 4.3 litres
Technical Data 243
Safety Fir Technical Data
m
Rear
1,424 mm
1,408 mm
itres
cordoba_ingles Seite 243 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Dimensions and capacities
Dimensions
Length, width 4,280 mm/ 1,698 m
Height at kerb weight 1,447 mm
Front and rear projection 831 mm/ 839 mm
Wheelbase 2,460 mm
Turning circle 10.54 m
Track widtha)
a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.
Front
1,435 mm
1,419 mm
Capacities
Fuel tank 45 litres, reserve 7 l
Windscreen washer fluid container with headlight washer 2 l/ 4.5 l
Tyre pressure
Summer-grade tyres:
The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap.
Winter tyres:
The pressure of these tyres is the same as the summer tyre pressure plus 0.2 bar.
cordoba_ingles Seite 244 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Index 245
coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
tery
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
tension device
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
ke assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
ke fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
ke pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
ke servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139, 143
ke system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
kes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
king distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
zer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 124
cordoba_ingles Seite 245 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Index
A ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Acoustic signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Acoustic warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Adjusting simple headlights
driving on the left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
driving on the right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Adjusting the seat belt height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Air conditioning system
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Air conditioning*
Semiautoamtic air conditioning* . . . . . . . . 115
Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Air recirculation
Semi-automatic air conditioning . . . . . . . . 117
Air recirculation mode
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Airbags
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Alarm system
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Alterations to the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Alternator
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Ambient temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 58
Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Anti-theft wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror*
Activating the anti-dazzle function . . . . . . . 96
Deactivating anti-dazzle function . . . . . . . . . 96
Automatic car washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Instructions for driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
B Ball
BAS
Bat
Belt
Belt
Bio
Bon
Bra
Bra
Bra
Bra
Bra
Bra
Bra
Buz
Index246
ning leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
ning plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
ning seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
ning steel wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
ning windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
ning wooden trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
atronic
utomatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
ontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
eneral notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
anual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
pit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
rol
ight switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
rol lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
rol lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
rols
lectric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
enience closing
liding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
indows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
enience opening
indows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
ant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
ant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
ant level
arning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
ant Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
cordoba_ingles Seite 246 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
C Car care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Car care products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Car phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Car washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Automatic speed dependent locking and un-
locking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Emergency unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Locking system for involuntary unlocking . . 72
Selective unlocking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Unlocking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Central locking button
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Cetane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Change lamps
dipped headlight lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Changing gear
See Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Changing lamps
interior light and reading light . . . . . . . . . . 213
changing lamps
rearlights on frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
rearlights on tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Changing the lamps
glovebox light* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
main beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Main headlight lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
side beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Side indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Changing windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . 180
Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Checking battery electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . 184
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Groups 0 and 0+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Child seats
on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Cleaning alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle . . . . . . . . 153
Cleaning chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Cleaning cloth seat covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Cleaning dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Cleaning engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Cleaning fabric trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Clea
Clea
Clea
Clea
Clea
Clea
Clim
a
c
G
m
Cloc
Cock
Cont
L
Cont
Cont
Cont
E
Conv
S
W
Conv
W
Cool
Cool
Cool
w
Cool
Index 247
tronic stabilisation programme (ESP)
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
ssion control system
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
ine
Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
ine compartment
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . 169
ine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
ine fault
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
ine management
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
ine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
ine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
ine oil pressure
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
ironmental tip
Avoiding pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 141
rior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
rnal aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
tening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 110
cordoba_ingles Seite 247 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Coolant temperature
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Correct adjustment of front head restraints . . . . 12
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
D Danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger
seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Diesel engine
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Differential lock fault (EDL)
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Dipped headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Disabling front passenger airbag
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Disabling the airbag
Disabling front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . 41
Displays in the Multi-function display
Memory displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Door lock cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Doors
Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Drive wheels traction control system . . . . . . . . 140
Driving
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
With a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Driving economically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Driving with respect for the environment . . . . . 151
Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Dust filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
E EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
EDS
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Electrical sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Electrohydraulic steering
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 125
Electronic stabilisation program . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Electronic stabilisation programme . . . . . . . . . . 66
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Elec
Emi
Eng
Eng
Eng
Eng
Eng
Eng
Eng
Eng
Env
ESP
Exte
Exte
F Fas
Index248
ator lights
ndication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
ument and switch lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
ument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
ument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
uments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
mittent wipe, windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
IX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
-starting: description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
ab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
p changes
eneral notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
compartment
ee Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
age compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 109
ee also Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . 15
age compartment cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
cordoba_ingles Seite 248 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Front ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Front cup holder* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Front interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Front passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . . . 41
Front reading light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Front seat adjustment
Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Fuel
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Fuel level
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Fuel Tank
Opening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Fuel tank
See Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
G G 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Gear shift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
General overview of the engine compartment 224
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
H Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 133
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
head restraints
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 101
adjustment of the head restraint angle . . . 101
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Headlight flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Heated front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Heating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
High pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
I Identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Indic
i
Instr
Instr
Instr
Instr
Inter
ISOF
J Jump
Jump
Jump
K Key t
Keys
L Lam
g
Ligh
Load
S
Lock
Lugg
S
Lugg
Index 249
en filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
ution filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
io frequency remote control
Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
io wave remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
sensor* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
r cupholder* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
r fog lamp
indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
r seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
r seats,
folding down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
r window heating
Heating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
r-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
elling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
ote control key
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
oving and fitting the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
airs
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
lacement keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
lacing lamps
fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
erse gear
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
cordoba_ingles Seite 249 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
M Main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Main beam headlights
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Main headlight lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Manual heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Manual heating system
Defrosting the windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Demisting the windscreen and side windows . .
113
MFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Mileage display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 58
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors, electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Make-up mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
N Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
O Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Octane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
One-touch opening and closing
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Opening and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Overview
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
P Paintwork
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Parking and dipped/side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Trips to foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Petrol engines, starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Physical principles of a frontal collision . . . . . . 19
Plastic key tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Poll
Poll
R Rad
Rad
Rain
Rea
Rea
Rea
Rea
Rea
Rea
Refu
Rem
Rem
Rep
Rep
Rep
Rev
Rev
Index250
chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190, 223
dometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
ing Petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
ing the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 126
fter the fuel tank has been run dry . . . . . 127
m cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
teering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
ring wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
ring wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . 122
age
ront right seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
age compartment
ront passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
oof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
oof blind
liding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
ch
azard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
ear window heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
ches
lectric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
lectrical exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
liding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
ching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
ate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
cordoba_ingles Seite 250 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
RME fuel (biodiesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Roll-back function
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Roof aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Roof carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Running in
Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Running in tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
S Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safety instructions
Coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Safety notes
Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Disabling front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . 42
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Safety system- safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 102
Seat belt position
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Seat belt warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Incorrectly fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Not worn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Seat belts protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Selective opening* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Semiautomatic air conditioning
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 58
Shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Sitting position
Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Sitting position, occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Snow
Spee
Start
Start
A
Stea
Stee
S
Stee
Stee
Stow
F
Stow
F
Sun
Sunr
Sunr
S
Swit
H
R
Swit
E
E
S
Swit
T Tailg
Index 251
ning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
ning triangles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
her fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
hing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
hing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
hing with high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . 155
er in the windscreen washer tank . . . . . . . 179
r indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
el bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194, 223
Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
el change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
el trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
els . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185, 222
assume the correct sitting position? . . . . . 28
should head restraints be correctly adjusted?
12
wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 19
wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
dows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
dscreen defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
dscreen wiper blades
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
dscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Changing blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Changing the rear blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
ter driving
Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
ter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
er/wash automatic function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
king in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 169
cordoba_ingles Seite 251 Freitag, 7. Oktober 2005 6:00 18
Tank
fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
reserve indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
TCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
TCS (Traction control system)
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
The danger of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . 20
Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149, 222
Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Towing bracket, fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Traction control system
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Trailer turn signals
Indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Trips, checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 92
Two-way radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Type plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Tyres and wheels
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Tyres service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Tyres tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Tyres with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . 186
U Underbody sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
V Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Vehicle interior heating or cooling system . . . 116
Vehicle paint
Car care products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Vehicle tools
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Vehicle wallet storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Volumetric sensor *
Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
W Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
War
War
Was
Was
Was
Was
Wat
Wea
Whe
Whe
Whe
Whe
Why
Why
Why
Why
Win
Win
Win
Win
Win
Win
Wip
Wor
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the "Copyright" Act.
All rights on changes
Related manuals for Seat Cordoba Edition 09.05 2005 Sedan Owner's Manual
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the Cordoba Seat works, you can view and download the Seat Cordoba Edition 09.05 2005 Sedan Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Seat Cordoba as well as other Seat manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Seat Cordoba. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Seat Cordoba Edition 09.05 2005 Sedan Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Seat Cordoba Edition 09.05 2005 Sedan Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Seat Cordoba Edition 09.05 2005 Sedan Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Seat Cordoba Edition 09.05 2005 Sedan Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Seat Cordoba Edition 09.05 2005 Sedan Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.